Tida 2010 PDF

ENGINE
EC
A
EC
SECTION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
HR16DE ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ..............51 F
ECM Terminal and Reference Value .......................51
SERVICE INFORMATION ........................... 14 CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) ...........................58
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor G
INDEX FOR DTC ................................................14 Mode ........................................................................62
DTC No. Index ........................................................ 14
Alphabetical Index ................................................... 15 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE ............................................................... 65 H
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................17 Description ...............................................................65
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Testing Condition .....................................................65
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Inspection Procedure ...............................................65 I
SIONER" ................................................................. 17 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................66
Precaution for SRS "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" Service .................................... 17 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine ........ 17 J
INCIDENT .......................................................... 73
Precaution ............................................................... 18 Description ...............................................................73
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................73
PREPARATION ..................................................21 K
Special Service Tool ............................................... 21 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 74
Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 21 Wiring Diagram ........................................................74
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................74 L
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................23 Ground Inspection ...................................................77
Schematic ............................................................... 23
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ......24 M
LINE ................................................................... 79
Introduction ............................................................. 24
Description ...............................................................79
Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 24
On Board Diagnosis Logic .......................................79
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................. 24
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................79 N
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ........................28 Wiring Diagram ........................................................80
Basic Inspection ...................................................... 28
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ............... 81
Procedure After Replacing ECM ............................. 31 O
Description ...............................................................81
Fuel Pressure Check ............................................... 32
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .....................................33 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................81
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 33 P
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ............................... 82
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 37
Description ...............................................................82
Fail-Safe Chart ........................................................ 38
Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 39
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................83
Engine Control Component Parts Location ............. 43
Overall Function Check ...........................................83
Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................... 48
Wiring Diagram - ECM - .......................................... 49 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ................... 85
Revision: June 2010 EC-1 2011 Tiida GOM

Component Description .......................................... 85 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 106
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 85
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 85 DTC P1065 ECM .............................................. 107
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 86 Component Description ........................................ 107
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 107
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .................... 87 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 107
Component Description .......................................... 87
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 87 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 88 VALVE .............................................................. 108
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 89 Component Description ........................................ 108
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ...................... 90 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 108
Component Description .......................................... 90 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 109
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 90 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CON-
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 91 TROL ACTUATOR ........................................... 110
Component Description ........................................ 110
DTC P0132 HO2S1 ............................................ 92 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 110
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 92 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CON-
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 93 TROL FUNCTION ............................................. 112
Description ............................................................ 112
DTC P0134 HO2S1 ............................................ 94 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 112
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 94 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 113
Overall Function Check .......................................... 94
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL
DTC P0138 HO2S2 ............................................ 96 MOTOR RELAY ................................................ 114
Component Description .......................................... 96 Component Description ........................................ 114
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 96 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 114
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 96 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 114
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 97 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 115
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ...................... 98 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR .. 116
Component Description .......................................... 98 Component Description ........................................ 116
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 98 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 116
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 98 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 116
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 99 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 117
DTC P0327, P0328 KS .................................... 100 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE.. 118
Component Description .........................................100 System Description ............................................... 118
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................100 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 119
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................100 Overall Function Check ......................................... 119
Wiring Diagram ......................................................101 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 121
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ................... 102 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 123
Component Description .........................................102 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR .................................. 124
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................102 Component Description ........................................ 124
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................102 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 124
Wiring Diagram ......................................................103 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 124
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) .............. 104 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR .................................. 125
Component Description .........................................104 Component Description ........................................ 125
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................104 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 125
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................104 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 125
Wiring Diagram ......................................................105
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ......... 126
DTC P0605 ECM .............................................. 106 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 126
Component Description .........................................106 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 126
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................106 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 127

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ................................ 128 DTC No. Index ....................................................... 148
Component Description ......................................... 128 Alphabetical Index ................................................. 150 A
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 128 PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 153
Overall Function Check ......................................... 128 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- EC
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 130
SIONER" ............................................................... 153
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH .......................... 131 Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-
Description ............................................................ 131 tion After Battery Disconnect ................................. 153 C
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 131 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 154
Fail-Safe Mode ...................................................... 131 On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 131 A/T ......................................................................... 154 D
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 132 Precaution ............................................................. 154
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR .................. 133 PREPARATION ............................................... 158
Component Description ......................................... 133 Special Service Tool .............................................. 158 E
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 133 Commercial Service Tool ...................................... 159
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 133
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 134 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ........................ 160 F
Schematic .............................................................. 160
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR .................. 135 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 160
Component Description ......................................... 135 Electronic Ignition (EI) System .............................. 163
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 135 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine G
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 135 Speed) ................................................................... 163
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 136
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ............ 165 H
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ................................. 137 Input/Output Signal Chart ...................................... 165
Component Description ......................................... 137 System Description ................................................ 165
CAN COMMUNICATION ................................. 166 I
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 138 System Description ................................................ 166
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ............................... 139 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ............. 167 J
Component Description ......................................... 139 Description ............................................................. 167
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 139 Component Inspection ........................................... 169
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 139 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM) ........ 171 K
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 140 Description ............................................................. 171
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ........... 141 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ....... 172
Component Description ......................................... 141 L
Description ............................................................. 172
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 142 Component Inspection ........................................... 172
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 143
Removal and Installation ....................................... 145 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .. 174 M
Introduction ............................................................ 174
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Two Trip Detection Logic ....................................... 174
(SDS) ................................................................ 146 Emission-related Diagnostic Information ............... 175
Fuel Pressure ........................................................ 146 N
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) .......................... 184
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing .............................. 146 OBD System Operation Chart ............................... 187
Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 146
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 146 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ..................... 193 O
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .................... 146 Basic Inspection .................................................... 193
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater .......................... 146 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check ................... 197
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater ........................... 146 Procedure After Replacing ECM ........................... 198 P
Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 146 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ..... 199
Fuel Injector .......................................................... 147 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 199
Fuel Pump ............................................................. 147 Idle Air Volume Learning ....................................... 199
MR18DE Fuel Pressure Check ............................................. 201
SERVICE INFORMATION ......................... 148 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .................................. 203

Trouble Diagnosis Introduction .............................. 203
INDEX FOR DTC .............................................. 148
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................207 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 262
Fail-Safe Chart ......................................................208 Component Inspection .......................................... 264
Symptom Matrix Chart ...........................................209 Removal and Installation ....................................... 265
Engine Control Component Parts Location ...........214
Vacuum Hose Drawing ..........................................219 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR .................... 266
Circuit Diagram ......................................................220 Component Description ........................................ 266
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............222 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 266
ECM Terminal and Reference Value .....................222 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 266
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) .........................228 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 267
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function .......................233 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 267
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor ....234 Component Inspection .......................................... 269
Removal and Installation ....................................... 269
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE ............................................................. 237 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ................... 270
Description .............................................................237 Component Description ........................................ 270
Testing Condition ...................................................237 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 270
Inspection Procedure .............................................237 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 271
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................238 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 272
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT Component Inspection .......................................... 274
INCIDENT ........................................................ 245 Removal and Installation ....................................... 274
Description .............................................................245
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................245
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ..................... 275
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 246 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Wiring Diagram ......................................................246 Mode ..................................................................... 275
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................247 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 275
Ground Inspection .................................................251 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 275
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 276
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 277
LINE ................................................................. 252 Component Inspection .......................................... 279
Description .............................................................252 Removal and Installation ....................................... 279
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................252
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................252 DTC P0132 HO2S1 ........................................... 280
Wiring Diagram ......................................................253 Component Description ........................................ 280
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................253 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 280
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ............. 254 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 280
Description .............................................................254 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 281
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................254 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 282
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................254 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 283
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................254 Component Inspection .......................................... 285
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ............................. 255
Description .............................................................255 DTC P0133 HO2S1 ........................................... 287
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Component Description ........................................ 287
Mode ......................................................................255 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................255 Mode ..................................................................... 287
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................256 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 287
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................257 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 288
Component Inspection ...........................................258 Overall Function Check ......................................... 288
Removal and Installation .......................................258 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 290
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ................. 259 Component Inspection .......................................... 294
Component Description .........................................259 Removal and Installation ....................................... 295
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................259 DTC P0134 HO2S1 ........................................... 296
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................259 Component Description ........................................ 296
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................259 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Wiring Diagram ......................................................261 Mode ..................................................................... 296

On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 296 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 297 FUNCTION ...................................................... 331 A
Overall Function Check ......................................... 297 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 331
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 298 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 331
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 299 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 333 EC
Component Inspection .......................................... 300 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 334
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR .................... 337
DTC P0135 HO2S1 HEATER ........................... 302 Component Description ......................................... 337 C
Description ............................................................ 302 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 337
Mode ..................................................................... 302 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 337 D
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 302 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 337
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 302 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 338
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 303 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 339 E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 304 Component Inspection ........................................... 341
Component Inspection .......................................... 306 Removal and Installation ....................................... 341
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER F
DTC P0138 HO2S2 .......................................... 307 MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE ....... 342
Component Description ......................................... 307 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 342
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 342 G
Mode ..................................................................... 307 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 343
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 307 DTC P0327, P0328 KS .................................... 348
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 308 Component Description ......................................... 348 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 309 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 348
Component Inspection .......................................... 310 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 348
Removal and Installation ....................................... 311 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 349 I
DTC P0139 HO2S2 .......................................... 312 Component Inspection ........................................... 351
Component Description ......................................... 312 Removal and Installation ....................................... 351 J
Mode ..................................................................... 312 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .................. 352
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 312 Component Description ......................................... 352
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 312 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor K
Overall Function Check ......................................... 313 Mode ...................................................................... 352
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 315 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 352
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 316 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 352 L
Component Inspection .......................................... 318 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 353
Removal and Installation ....................................... 319 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 354
Component Inspection ........................................... 357
DTC P0141 HO2S2 HEATER ........................... 320 M
Description ............................................................ 320
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ............. 358
Mode ..................................................................... 320 Component Description ......................................... 358 N
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 320 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 358
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 320 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 358
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 321 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 359 O
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 322 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 360
Component Inspection .......................................... 324 Component Inspection ........................................... 362
Removal and Installation ....................................... 324 Removal and Installation ....................................... 362
P
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNC-
FUNCTION ....................................................... 325 TION ................................................................ 363
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 325 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 363
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 325 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 363
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 327 Overall Function Check ......................................... 364
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 328 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 364

DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOL- DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 391
UME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .............. 368 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 392
Description .............................................................368 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 393
Mode ......................................................................368
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR .. 395
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................369
Wiring Diagram ......................................................370
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 396
Component Inspection ...........................................373
Component Inspection .......................................... 398
Removal and Installation .......................................373
DTC P0500 VSS .............................................. 374
Description .............................................................374
DTC P1143 HO2S1 ........................................... 400
Overall Function Check .........................................375 Mode ..................................................................... 400
DTC P0605 ECM .............................................. 376 Overall Function Check ......................................... 401
Component Description .........................................376 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 402
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................376 Component Inspection .......................................... 403
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................376 Removal and Installation ....................................... 404
DTC P1144 HO2S1 ........................................... 405
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID Component Description ........................................ 405
VALVE ............................................................. 378 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Description .........................................378 Mode ..................................................................... 405
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 405
Mode ......................................................................378 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 406
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................378 Overall Function Check ......................................... 406
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................378 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 406
Wiring Diagram ......................................................379 Component Inspection .......................................... 408
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................380 Removal and Installation ....................................... 409
DTC P1146 HO2S2 ........................................... 410
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CON- CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
TROL ACTUATOR .......................................... 383 Mode ..................................................................... 410
Component Description .........................................383 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 410
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................383 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 410
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................383 Overall Function Check ......................................... 411
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CON- Component Inspection .......................................... 416
TROL FUNCTION ............................................ 385 Removal and Installation ....................................... 417
Description .............................................................385
DTC P1147 HO2S2 ........................................... 418
Wiring Diagram ......................................................386
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................387 Mode ..................................................................... 418
Overall Function Check ......................................... 419
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 421
MOTOR RELAY ............................................... 391 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 422
Component Description .........................................391 Component Inspection .......................................... 424
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Removal and Installation ....................................... 425
Mode ......................................................................391
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE.. 426

System Description ............................................... 426 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 455 A
Mode ..................................................................... 427 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 455
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 427 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 455
Overall Function Check ......................................... 427 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 456 EC
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 429 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 457
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 430 Component Inspection ........................................... 459
Main 13 Causes of Overheating ............................ 433 Removal and Installation ....................................... 459
Component Inspection .......................................... 434 C
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ................. 460
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ................................. 436 Component Description ......................................... 460
Component Description ......................................... 436 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor D
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 436 Mode ...................................................................... 460
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 436 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 460
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 436 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 461
E
Removal and Installation ....................................... 437 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 462
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ................................. 438 Component Inspection ........................................... 465
Component Description ......................................... 438 Removal and Installation ....................................... 466 F
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 438 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ................................ 467
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 438 Component Description ......................................... 467
G
Removal and Installation ....................................... 439 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 467
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ......... 440 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 467
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 440 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 467 H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 440 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 468
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 442 Component Inspection ........................................... 471 I
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ................................ 445
Component Description ......................................... 445 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ............................. 472
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor J
Component Description ......................................... 472
Mode ..................................................................... 445 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 445 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 472 K
Overall Function Check ......................................... 446 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 473
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 447 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 474
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 448 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 475 L
DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR .............. 450
Description ............................................................ 450
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ........................ 479 M
Mode ..................................................................... 450 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 450 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 479 N
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH .......................... 451 FUEL INJECTOR ............................................ 481
Description ............................................................ 451 Component Description ......................................... 481
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor O
Mode ..................................................................... 451 Mode ...................................................................... 481
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 451 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 482
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 451 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 483 P
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 453 Removal and Installation ....................................... 485
FUEL PUMP .................................................... 486
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR .................. 455 Description ............................................................. 486
Component Description ......................................... 455 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 486

Wiring Diagram ......................................................487 IGNITION TIMING ................................................... 516
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................488 IGNITION TIMING : Description ........................... 516
Component Inspection ...........................................490 IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement. 516
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARN-
IGNITION SIGNAL ........................................... 491 ING ........................................................................... 517
Component Description .........................................491 THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION
Wiring Diagram ......................................................492 LEARNING : Description ....................................... 517
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................495 THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION
Component Inspection ...........................................498 LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement ............ 518
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .......... 500 CLEAR ..................................................................... 518
Component Description .........................................500 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
Wiring Diagram ......................................................501 CLEAR : Description ............................................. 518
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................502 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
Removal and Installation .......................................504 CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement .................. 518
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR .............. 505 WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE .......................... 519
Wiring Diagram ......................................................505 WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE : Description ... 519
WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE : Special Re-
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS pair Requirement .................................................. 519
(SDS) ................................................................ 507
Fuel Pressure ........................................................507 FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ........................... 521
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ..............................507
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .......................... 521
Calculated Load Value ..........................................507
System Diagram ................................................... 521
Mass Air Flow Sensor ............................................507
System Description ............................................... 522
Intake Air Temperature Sensor .............................507
Component Parts Location .................................. 522
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ....................507
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ..........................507
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater ...........................508 MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ....... 529
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ........................508 System Diagram ................................................... 529
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .....................508 System Description ............................................... 529
Throttle Control Motor ............................................508 Component Parts Location .................................. 532
Fuel Injector ...........................................................508 Component Description ........................................ 537
Fuel Pump .............................................................508
MR18DE (FFV) ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM ....................... 539
System Diagram ................................................... 539
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 509 System Description ............................................... 539
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ....... 509 Component Description ........................................ 545
Work Flow ..............................................................509
Diagnostic Work Sheet ..........................................511 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ............. 546
System Diagram ................................................... 546
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................. 513 System Description ............................................... 546
BASIC INSPECTION ................................................513
BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Require-
ment .......................................................................513 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING (ASCD) .............................................................. 553
CONTROL UNIT .......................................................515 System Diagram ................................................... 553
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING System Description ............................................... 553
CONTROL UNIT : Description ...............................516 Component Parts Location .................................. 555
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Component Description ........................................ 560
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ....516
CAN COMMUNICATION .................................. 561
IDLE SPEED ............................................................516 System Description ............................................... 561
IDLE SPEED : Description ....................................516
IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement .........516
COOLING FAN CONTROL .............................. 562
System Diagram ................................................... 562
System Description ............................................... 562
Component Parts Location .................................. 564 P0036, P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ......... 630
Component Description ......................................... 569 Description ............................................................. 630 A
DTC Logic .............................................................. 630
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM .............. 570 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 631
System Diagram .................................................... 570 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 632
System Description ............................................... 571 EC
Component Description ........................................ 577 P0053 HO2S1 HEATER .................................. 634
Description ............................................................. 634 C
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL ............... 578 DTC Logic .............................................................. 634
System Diagram .................................................... 578 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 635
System Description ............................................... 578 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 635 D
Component Parts Location .................................. 579 Component Inspection ........................................... 637
Component Description ......................................... 584
P0054 HO2S2 HEATER .................................. 638
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 585 Description ............................................................. 638 E
Diagnosis Description ........................................... 585 DTC Logic .............................................................. 638
CONSULT-III Function .......................................... 598 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 639
Diagnosis Tool Function ...................................... 604 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 639 F
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 606
P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 642
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION G
Description ............................................................. 642
VALUE .............................................................. 606 DTC Logic .............................................................. 642
Description ............................................................ 606
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 643
Component Function Check .................................. 606 H
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 648
INCIDENT ......................................................... 614 I
Description ............................................................. 648
Description ............................................................ 614 DTC Logic .............................................................. 648
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 614 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 649
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 649 J
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 615
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 615 P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 654
Ground Inspection ................................................. 618 K
Description ............................................................. 654
U1000, U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .............. 620 DTC Logic .............................................................. 654
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 655
Description ............................................................ 620 L
DTC Logic ............................................................. 620
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 621 P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 658 M
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 622 Description ............................................................. 658
DTC Logic .............................................................. 658
Description ............................................................ 622
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 659
DTC Logic ............................................................. 622 N
P0011 IVT CONTROL ...................................... 623
DTC Logic ............................................................. 623
P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 662 O
Description ............................................................. 662
DTC Logic .............................................................. 662
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 663 P
P0030, P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER .......... 626 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 663
Description ............................................................ 626 Component Inspection ........................................... 665
DTC Logic ............................................................. 626 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 666
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 627
P0125 ECT SENSOR ...................................... 667
Description ............................................................. 667
DTC Logic .............................................................. 667
Component Inspection ...........................................668 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 720
P0130 HO2S1 .................................................. 669 Component Inspection .......................................... 722
Description .............................................................669
DTC Logic ..............................................................669 P0201, P0261, P0262 FUEL INJECTOR ......... 724
Wiring Diagram ......................................................671 Description ............................................................ 724
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................671 DTC Logic ............................................................. 724
Description .............................................................675
Description .............................................................681
Description .............................................................687
Description .............................................................695
DTC Logic ..............................................................695 P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR .............................. 740
Description .............................................................701 Special Repair Requirement ................................. 744
DTC Logic ..............................................................701
Wiring Diagram ......................................................702 P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MIS-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................702 FIRE .................................................................. 745
Component Inspection ...........................................704 DTC Logic ............................................................. 745
P0137 HO2S2 .................................................. 707
Description .............................................................707 P0327 KS .......................................................... 750
DTC Logic ..............................................................707 Description ............................................................ 750
Wiring Diagram ......................................................708 DTC Logic ............................................................. 750
Component Inspection ...........................................710 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 751
P0138 HO2S2 .................................................. 713
Description .............................................................713 P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ............................ 753
Wiring Diagram ......................................................714 DTC Logic ............................................................. 753
Component Inspection ...........................................716 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 754
P0139 HO2S2 .................................................. 719
Description .............................................................719 P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ....................... 758

DTC Logic ............................................................. 758 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 790
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 760 Component Inspection ........................................... 791 A
Component Inspection .......................................... 763 P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ........ 793
DTC Logic .............................................................. 793
P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354 IGNITION COIL.. 764 Component Function Check .................................. 793 EC
Description ............................................................ 764 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 794
DTC Logic ............................................................. 764
Component Function Check .................................. 764 P1299 TP SENSOR ......................................... 797 C
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 766 Description ............................................................. 797
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 767 DTC Logic .............................................................. 797
Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 797
D
Transistor) ............................................................. 770
P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................. 800
Component Inspection (Condenser) ..................... 771
Description ............................................................. 800
P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION.. 772 DTC Logic .............................................................. 800 E
DTC Logic ............................................................. 772 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 801
Component Function Check .................................. 772 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 801
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 772 Component Inspection ........................................... 803 F
P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 804
VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ....... 776 Description ............................................................. 804
Description ............................................................ 776 DTC Logic .............................................................. 804 G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 777 Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) ....... 810 H
Component Inspection .......................................... 779 Component Inspection (ASCD Clutch Switch) ...... 811
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 811
P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ........................ 780
P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 813 I
Description ............................................................ 780
DTC Logic ............................................................. 780 Description ............................................................. 813
Component Function Check .................................. 780 DTC Logic .............................................................. 813
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 781 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 813 J
P0462, P0463, P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.. 782 P1706 PNP SWITCH ....................................... 815
Description ............................................................ 782 Description ............................................................. 815
DTC Logic .............................................................. 815 K
DTC Logic ............................................................. 782
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 782 Component Function Check .................................. 816
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 817
P0500 VSS ....................................................... 783 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 817 L
Description ............................................................ 783
DTC Logic ............................................................. 783 P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 820
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 784 Description ............................................................. 820
M
DTC Logic .............................................................. 820
P0562 BATTERY VOLTAGE ........................... 785 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 821
DTC Logic ............................................................. 785 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 821
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 785 Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 823 N
P0563 BATTERY VOLTAGE ........................... 786 P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MO-
DTC Logic ............................................................. 786 TOR RELAY .................................................... 824 O
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 786 Description ............................................................. 824
DTC Logic .............................................................. 824
P0605 ECM ....................................................... 787 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 825
Description ............................................................ 787 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 825 P
DTC Logic ............................................................. 787
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 788 P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION ...................................................... 827
P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..... 789 Description ............................................................. 827
Description ............................................................ 789 DTC Logic .............................................................. 827

Special Repair Requirement ..................................831 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 861
Component Inspection (Sub Fuel Pump Relay) .... 862
P2109 TP SENSOR ......................................... 832
Description .............................................................832 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ................................... 864
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................832 Component Function Check ................................. 864
Special Repair Requirement ..................................832 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 865
P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) ....... 868
ACTUATOR ..................................................... 833 Component Inspection (ASCD Clutch Switch) ...... 868
Description .............................................................833
DTC Logic ..............................................................833 ASCD INDICATOR ........................................... 870
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................833 Description ............................................................ 870
Special Repair Requirement ..................................834 Component Function Check ................................. 870
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 871
P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR .......................... 835 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 871
Description .............................................................835
DTC Logic ..............................................................835 COOLING FAN ................................................. 873
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................836 Component Function Check ................................. 873
Special Repair Requirement ..................................839 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 875
P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR .......................... 840
Description .............................................................840 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL .......................... 879
Wiring Diagram ......................................................841 Component Function Check ................................. 879
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................841 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 879
Special Repair Requirement ..................................844 FUEL PUMP ..................................................... 881
Description ............................................................ 881
P2135 TP SENSOR ......................................... 845 Component Function Check ................................. 881
Description .............................................................845 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 882
DTC Logic ..............................................................845 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 882
Wiring Diagram ......................................................846 Component Inspection (Fuel Pump) ..................... 885
Component Inspection ...........................................848 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP ................ 886
Special Repair Requirement ..................................849 Description ............................................................ 886
Component Function Check ................................. 886
P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 850 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 887
Description .............................................................850 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 888
DTC Logic ..............................................................850
Wiring Diagram ......................................................851 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ......... 890
Component Inspection ...........................................854 Component Inspection .......................................... 890
Special Repair Requirement ..................................855 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ........... 891
P3021, P3022, P3023 SUB FUEL CONTROL Description ............................................................ 891
SOLENOID VALVE .......................................... 856 Component Function Check ................................. 891
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 892
Description .............................................................856
DTC Logic ..............................................................856
Wiring Diagram ......................................................857 SUB FUEL PUMP ............................................. 895
Component Inspection ...........................................858 Component Function Check ................................. 895
P3075, P3077, P3078 SUB FUEL PUMP RE- Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 896
LAY .................................................................. 860
Component Inspection (Sub Fuel Pump Relay) .... 898
Description .............................................................860
DTC Logic ..............................................................860 ECU DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 899

ECM .................................................................. 899 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine
Reference Value ................................................... 899 and A/T .................................................................. 930 A
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 909 General Precautions .............................................. 930
Fail Safe ............................................................... 910
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................. 912 PREPARATION ......................................... 933
EC
DTC Index ............................................................ 913
PREPARATION ............................................... 933
How to Set SRT Code ........................................ 915
Special Service Tools ............................................ 933
Test Value and Test Limit ..................................... 917
Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 933 C
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 924 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 934
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .... 924 D
FUEL PRESSURE ........................................... 934
Symptom Table ..................................................... 924
Inspection .............................................................. 934
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 928
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ............. 936 E
Description ............................................................ 928
Inspection .............................................................. 936
PRECAUTION ............................................ 929 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 929 (SDS) .......................................................... 937 F
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
SIONER" ............................................................... 929 (SDS) ............................................................... 937 G
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- Idle Speed ............................................................. 937
tion After Battery Disconnect ................................. 929 Ignition Timing ....................................................... 937
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 930 H

INDEX FOR DTC
< SERVICE INFORMATION > [HR16DE]
SERVICE INFORMATION
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC No. Index INFOID:0000000006029194
DTC*1 Items
Reference page
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
CONSULT-III ECM*2
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
No DTC Flashing*4 FURTHER TESTING —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
U1000*3, *5 1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-79
U1001*3 1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-79

U1010 1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN) EC-81
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-82
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-85
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-87
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 EC-90
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 EC-90
6 0132 HO2S1 (B1) EC-92
P0132*
P0134*6 0134 HO2S1 (B1) EC-94
P0138*6 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-96

P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 EC-98
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 EC-98
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-100
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-102
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-104
P0605 0605 ECM EC-106
P1065 1065 7 EC-107
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*
P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-108
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR EC-110
P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC EC-112
P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR EC-114
P1128 1128 ETC MOT EC-116
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-118
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING-B1 EC-124
P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-126
P1610 1610 LOCK MODE BL-215

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1 Items
Reference page A
CONSULT-III 2 (CONSULT-III screen terms)
ECM*
P1611 1611 ID DISCORD,IMMU-ECM BL-215
P1612 1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU BL-215 EC
P1614 1614 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY BL-215
P1615 1615 DIFFERENCE OF KEY BL-215
C
P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-128
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-131
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-133 D
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-133
E
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR-B1 EC-137
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-139 F
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
*3: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III. G
*4: When engine is running, MIL may flash.
*5: For A/T models
*6: Unleaded fuel models H
*7:This self-diagnosis is not for ECM power supply circuit, even though “ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
Alphabetical Index INFOID:0000000006029195

I
Items DTC*1
Reference page J
(CONSULT-III screen terms) CONSULT-III ECM*2
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 EC-133
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 EC-133 K
L
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 EC-139
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 EC-131
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000*3, *5 1000 EC-79 M
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001*3 1001 EC-79
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU P1612 1612 BL-215
N
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY P1614 1614 BL-215
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-102
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 EC-104 O
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 EC-81
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1225 1225 EC-124
P
DIFFERENCE OF KEY P1615 1615 BL-215
ECM P0605 0605 EC-106
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*7 P1065 1065 EC-107

ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 EC-87

INDEX FOR DTC
Items DTC*1
Reference page
(CONSULT-III screen terms) CONSULT-III ECM*2
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-118
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 EC-110
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 EC-112
ETC MOT P1128 1128 EC-116
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 EC-114
HO2S1 (B1) P0132*6 0132 EC-92
HO2S1 (B1) P0134*6 0134 EC-94
HO2S2 (B1) P0138*6 0138 EC-96

ID DISCORD,IMMU-ECM P1611 1611 BL-215
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 EC-82
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 EC-108
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 EC-100
LOCK MODE P1610 1610 BL-215
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0102 0102 EC-85
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING No DTC Flashing*4 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 EC-128
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 EC-126
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0222 0222 EC-98
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0223 0223 EC-98
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0122 0122 EC-90
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0123 0123 EC-90
TP SENSOR-B1 P2135 2135 EC-137
*2: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
*3: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III.
*5: For A/T models
*6: Unleaded fuel models
*7:This self-diagnosis is not for ECM power supply circuit, even though “ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT” is displayed on CONSULT-iII screen.

PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
A
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006140897
EC
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SUPPLEMENTAL C
RESTRAINT SYSTEM” and “SEAT BELTS” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by D
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag E
Module, see the “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
F
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING: G
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly H
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
Precaution for SRS "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" Service
INFOID:0000000006140896
• Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual. J
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three
minutes.
For approximately three minutes after the terminals are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat
K
belt pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least three min-
utes have passed.
• The air bag diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark “⇐” pointing toward the front
of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust L
before installation and replace as required.
• The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to
turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear. M
• Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down.
• Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
• After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged. N
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine INFOID:0000000006029198
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the O
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair P
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-63, "Description".

PRECAUTIONS
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM before
returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution INFOID:0000000006029199
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

• Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative bat-
tery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then dis-
connect negative battery cable.
SEF289H
• Do not disassemble ECM.

• If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. So,
engine operation can vary slightly in this case. However, this
is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts
because of a slight variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related
diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
- Diagnostic trouble codes
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
PBIA9222J
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data
• When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten (B) it
securely with a lever (1) as far as it will go as shown in the fig-
ure.
- ECM (2)
- Loosen (A)
PBIB2947E
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin
terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) volt-
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam-
age to ICs.
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal-
PBIB0090E
functions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation
of ICs, etc.
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.

PRECAUTIONS
• Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. A
Refer to EC-51, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value".
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
EC
• Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious
incidents.
• Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), C
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MEF040D
D
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation E
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
F
G
SAT652J
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow H

the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor. I
• Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/out-
put voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's tran-
sistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
J
ground.
SEF348N

PRECAUTIONS
• Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
- Fuel pressure regulator (1)
- Fuel pump (2)
• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
PBIB2952E
• Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

• Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessar-
ily.
• Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to

observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic
control systems depending on installation location.
- Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic con-
trol units.
- Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave
radio can be kept smaller.
- Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
SEF708Y

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000006029200
EC
Tool number
Description
Tool name
EG17550000 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester
C
Break-out box
ZZA1194D
E
Y-cable adapter
G
PBIA9379J
KV101118400 Measuring fuel pressure

Fuel tube adapter H
PBIB3043E
J
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000006029201
K
Tool name Description
Quick connector re- Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine
lease room
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG: Part L
No. 16441 6N210)
PBIC0198E
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening N
pressure
S-NT653
P

PREPARATION
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
seize lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica-
tion MIL-A-907)
S-NT779

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
A
Schematic INFOID:0000000006029202
EC
P
JMBIA2088GB

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Introduction INFOID:0000000006029203
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Freeze Frame data
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data 1st trip Freeze Frame data
CONSULT-III × × × ×
ECM × ×* — —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-38,
"Fail-Safe Chart".)
Two Trip Detection Logic INFOID:0000000006029204
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-related Diagnostic Information INFOID:0000000006029205
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

×:Applicable —: Not applicable
1
Items DTC* Reference
Trip MIL
(CONSULT-III screen terms) page
CONSULT-III ECM*2
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*3, *5 2 — EC-79
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*3 2 — EC-79

CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 2 — EC-81
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — Flashing*4 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 2 — EC-82
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0102 0102 1 × EC-85

Items DTC*1 Reference

Trip MIL A
(CONSULT-III screen terms) CONSULT-III 2 page
ECM*
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0103 0103 1 × EC-85
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 2 × EC-87 EC
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 2 × EC-87
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0122 0122 1 × EC-90
C
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0123 0123 1 × EC-90
HO2S1 (B1)*6 P0132 0132*6 2 × EC-92
HO2S1 (B1)*6 P0134 0134*6 2 × EC-94 D
HO2S2 (B1)*6 P0138 0138*6 2 × EC-96

TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0222 0222 1 × EC-98 E
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0223 0223 1 × EC-98
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-100
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 2 — EC-100 F
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 × EC-102
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 × EC-104
G
ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-106
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*7 P1065 1065 2 × EC-107

INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 2 × EC-108
H
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 × EC-110

ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 × EC-112
I
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 × EC-114
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 × EC-114
ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 × EC-116 J
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-118
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1225 1225 2 — EC-124
K
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1226 1226 2 — EC-125
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 × EC-126
LOCK MODE P1610 1610 2 — BL-215 L
ID DISCORD,IMMU-ECM P1611 1611 2 — BL-215
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU P1612 1612 2 — BL-215
M
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY P1614 1614 2 — BL-215
DIFFERENCE OF KEY P1615 1615 2 — BL-215
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 2 × EC-128 N
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 1 × EC-131
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 1 × EC-133
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 1 × EC-133
O
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 × EC-135

APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 1 × EC-135 P
TP SENSOR-B1 P2135 2135 1 × EC-137
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 1 × EC-139
*2: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.

*5: For A/T models
*6: Unleaded fuel models
*7:This self-diagnosis is not for ECM power supply circuit, even though “ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not recur, the 1st trip DTC
will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in "HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-33, "Trouble Diagnosis Introduction". Then per-
form DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the mal-
function is duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III displays the DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode. Examples: P0117, P0340, P1217, etc.
(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
Without CONSULT-III
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0117, 0340, 1217, etc.
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, the Diagnostic Test Mode II does not indicate
whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if available) is recom-
mended.
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short-term fuel trim, long-term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake
air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL ON) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
WITH CONSULT-III
NOTE:
If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 sec-
onds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.

1. Select “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result”. A
3. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in ECM will be erased.)
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
NOTE: EC
1. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I.
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 C
hours.
• The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
- Diagnostic trouble codes D
- Freeze frame data
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all E
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Basic Inspection INFOID:0000000006029206
1.INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
- Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
- Hoses and ducts for leaks
- Air cleaner clogging
- Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
- Headlamp switch is OFF.
- Air conditioner switch is OFF.
- Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
SEF983U
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary.
>> GO TO 3
3.CHECK IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.

2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. A
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) EC

M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
PBIA8513J
D
Without CONSULT-III
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about E
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING H
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
I
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING J
Perform Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.
>> GO TO 6. K
6.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

Perform Idle Air Volume Learning. L
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7. M
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
7.CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN N
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. O
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) P
Without CONSULT-III


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the Following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-104.
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-102.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
9.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-211, "ECM
Re-communicating Function".
>> GO TO 4.
10.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
- Timing indicator (1)
A/T: 6 ± 5°BTDC (in P or N position)

M/T: 6 ± 5°BTDC (in Neutral position)
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB2954E
11.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 12.
12.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.
>> GO TO 13.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
2. GO TO 4.
14.CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-III
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.

A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) A

Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) C

OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN E
- Timing indicator (1) F
A/T: 6 ± 5°BTDC (in P or N position)

M/T: 6 ± 5°BTDC (in Neutral position) G
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 16. H
PBIB2954E
16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION I
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-77, "Removal and Installation".

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
K
Check the following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-104. L
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-102.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. M
2. GO TO 4.
18.CHECK ECM FUNCTION N
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-211, "ECM O
>> GO TO 4. P
Procedure After Replacing ECM INFOID:0000000006029207
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.


3. Perform Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.
4. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
Fuel Pressure Check INFOID:0000000006029208
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
• Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
• The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
• Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside.
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, rear defogger, A/C,
etc.) Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres-
sure cannot be completely released because C11 models do not have fuel return system.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction INFOID:0000000006029209
INTRODUCTION EC
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen- C
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
D
E
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit- F

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace- G
ment of good parts.
SEF233G
I
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-III or a circuit tester connected should be per- J
formed. Follow the Work Flow on "WORK FLOW".
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus- K
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example
on "Worksheet Sample" should be used. L
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle. M
WORK FLOW

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Overall Sequence
PBIB3637E
Detailed Flow
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET".
>> GO TO 2.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2.CHECK DTC*1 A
1. Check DTC*1.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed.
- Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2. (Print them out with CONSULT-III.) EC
1
- Erase DTC* . (Refer to EC-24, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".)
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-39, "Symptom Matrix Chart".) C
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
D
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5. E
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. F
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5. G
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. H
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
I
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
J
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1, and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected
again.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-37, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order. K
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
• Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This L
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirmation
Procedure. M
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.
N
No >> Check according to EC-73.
6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-28, "Basic Inspection". O
With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7.
Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 9. P
7.PERFORM SPEC OF DATA MONITOR MODE
With CONSULT-III
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value using
“SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-65, "Inspection Procedure".
Are they within the SP value?
Yes >> GO TO 9.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-66, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-39, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom
in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 10.
Inspect the system.
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-III. Refer to EC-51, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value", EC-62, "CONSULT-III Reference
Value in Data Monitor Mode".
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors after repair and replacement.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-24, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
>> GO TO 12.
12.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM.
(Refer to EC-24, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".)
2. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
SEF907L

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Worksheet Sample
A
EC
L
MTBL0017
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000006029210 M
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE: N
• If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-79.
• If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to O
EC-81.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 • U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
• U1010 CAN communication
• P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
• P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor
• P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
• P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
• P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• P0605 ECM
• P1229 Sensor power supply
• P1610 - P1615 NATS
• P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
• P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 • P0132 P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1
• P0138 Heated oxygen sensor 2
• P1065 ECM
• P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• P1122 Electric throttle control function
• P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay
• P1128 Throttle control motor
• P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
• P1805 Brake switch
3 • P0011 Intake valve timing control
• P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
Fail-Safe Chart INFOID:0000000006029211
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P0123 in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P0223 condition.
P2135 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1121 Electric throttle control actu- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return
ator spring malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to
20 degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P (A/T), Neutral (M/T) position, and engine speed will not
exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
P1122 Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
tion fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124 Throttle control relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1126 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
P1805 Brake switch ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a
small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition EC
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
C
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P2123 sensor in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2128 condition. D
• When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there
is malfunction on engine control system. E
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
F
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut G
Symptom Matrix Chart INFOID:0000000006029212
H
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM I
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

K
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
L
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA N

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 O
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Air Positive crankcase ventilation system 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1
3 3 P
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
1
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3
1 2 3 2 2 2 2
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit
Throttle position sensor circuit
2 2
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
Knock sensor circuit 2 3
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3
PNP signal circuit 3 3 3 3 3
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4
Electrical load signal circuit 3
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next table)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM A

EC



C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA F

Fuel Fuel tank
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5
Vapor lock G
5
Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low oc- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
H
tane)
Air Air duct
Air cleaner I
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric throttle con-
5 5 5 5 5 5
trol actuator)
5 5 5 5 J
Electric throttle control actuator
Air leakage from intake manifold/Collector/
Gasket
K
Cranking Battery
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit
Starter circuit 3 1 L
Signal plate 6
PNP signal circuit 4
M
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block N
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 O
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft P
Valve mecha- Timing chain
nism
Camshaft
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Intake valve
3
Exhaust valve

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/Gasket
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Three way catalyst
Lubrication Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil
gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
Thermostat 5
Water pump
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery
Cooling fan
5
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminated coolant
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) 1 1

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000006029213
EC
PBIB2939E
M
1. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor
and spark plug valve N
4. Knock sensor 5. Fuel injector 6. Cooling fan motor
7. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 8. IPDM E/R 9. ECM
10. Mass air flow sensor 11. Engine coolant temperature sensor 12. Electric throttle control actuator O
(with intake air temperature sensor) (with built-in throttle position sensor,
throttle control motor)
13. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB2940E
: Vehicle front
1. Mass air flow sensor 2. Engine coolant temperature sensor 3. Electric throttle control actuator
(with intake air temperature sensor)
4. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 5. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 6. Fuel injector
solenoid valve

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
L
PBIB2941E
: Vehicle front M
1. ECM harness connectors 2. ECM 3. IPDM E/R
4. Fuel pump fuse (15A) 5. Intake valve timing control solenoid 6. Knock sensor
valve N
7. Refrigerant pressure sensor 8. PCV valve

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB2942E
PBIB2943E
: Vehicle front
1. Exhaust manifold 2. Heated oxygen sensor 1 3. Heated oxygen sensor 2
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 harness
connector

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
L
PBIB2944E
1. Cooling fan motor 2. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 3. Stop lamp switch M
4. Brake pedal 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Accelerator pedal position sensor
harness connector
7. Accelerator pedal 8. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 9. Fuel pressure regulator N
harness connector
10. Fuel pump

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Vacuum Hose Drawing INFOID:0000000006029214
PBIB2946E
: Vehicle front : From EVAP canister

1. Intake manifold 2. EVAP canister purge volume control 3. EVAP purge resonator
solenoid valve
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hoses or purge hoses.
Refer to EC-23, "Schematic" for Vacuum Control System.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram - ECM - INFOID:0000000006029215
EC
AABWA0462GB
P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
AABWA0139GB

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000006029216
EC
PBIA9221J
D
ECM Terminal and Reference Value INFOID:0000000006029217
E
PREPARATION
1. ECM (1) is located in the engine room left side near battery.
• : Vehicle front
F
PBIB2959E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. I

• When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen (A) it
with levers (1) as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
- ECM (2) J
- Fasten (B)
3. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector. K
• Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
• Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
L
PBIB2947E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. M
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. N

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 3.2V
[Ignition switch: ON]

Throttle control motor • Engine stopped
1 L
(Open) • Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
PBIA8150J
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE

2 SB [Ignition switch: ON]
power supply (11 - 14V)
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm.
Heated oxygen sensor 1
3 G
heater
PBIA8148J

• Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm.
Approximately 1.8V

• Engine stopped
4 P Throttle control motor (Close)
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
PBIA8149J
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
• Below 3,600 rpm after the following condi-
tions are met.
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for
5 G
heater 1 minute under no load
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) EC
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed C
EVAP canister purge volume D

9 P PBIB0050E
control solenoid valve
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running] E
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
NOTE:
Voltage and Duty percent may vary. F
PBIB0520E
10 B [Engine is running]
ECM ground Body ground G
11 B • Idle speed
3 - 5V
[Engine is running]
H
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on I
rpm at idle.
PBIA8164J
13 L Tachometer signal
3 - 5V J
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition K
• Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PBIA8165J L
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF]
15 Y Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V M
0 - 0.3V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition N
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on
O
rpm at idle.
17 R Ignition signal No. 1
18 LG Ignition signal No. 2 PBIA9265J
21 G Ignition signal No. 4

22 SB Ignition signal No. 3
0.2 - 0.5V P
[Engine is running]
PBIA9266J

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch
0 - 1.0V
ON
23 GR Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than 1 second after turning ignition
(11 - 14V)
switch ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
25 V Fuel injector No. 4
29 Y Fuel injector No. 3 PBIB0529E
30 O Fuel injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE

31 L Fuel injector No. 1
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIA4943J
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turning ig-
(11 - 14V)
nition switch OFF
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
33 LG Throttle position sensor 1
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
34 O Throttle position sensor 2
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
36 Y • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Throttle position sensor)
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
37 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
• Idle speed
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Engine coolant temperature
38 P [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
sensor
coolant temperature.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
40 — • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V EC
(Knock sensor)
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
41 GR Refrigerant pressure sensor • Both A/C switch and blower fan switch are 1.0 - 4.0V
C
ON
(Compressor operates.)
Sensor ground [Engine is running] D
44 B (Engine coolant temperature • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) • Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON] E
Approximately 0.4V
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition 1.0 - 1.3V
45 G Mass air flow sensor • Idle speed
F
[Engine is running] 1.0 - 1.3 to Approximately 2.4V

• Warm-up condition (Check for linear voltage rise in re-
• Engine is revving from idle to about 4,000 sponse to engine being increased G
rpm to about 4,000 rpm.)
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature
46 V
sensor
[Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake H
air temperature.
Sensor ground [Engine is running]
48 BR (Refrigerant pressure sen- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
I
sor) • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
0 - Approximately 1.0V
49 W Heated oxygen sensor 1 • Warm-up condition
(Periodically change) J
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are K
met.
50 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 0 - Approximately 1.0V
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for L
1 minute under no load
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
52 LG • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V M
(Mass air flow sensor)
• Idle speed
55 O (Intake air temperature sen- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
N
sor) • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
56 B • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor 1) O
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
59 O • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
• Idle speed P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 4.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
Crankshaft position sensor PBIB2998E

61 W
(POS)
Approximately 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB2999E

62 R [Crankshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(POS)] • Idle speed
63 BR [Camshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(PHASE)] • Idle speed
1.0 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
Camshaft position sensor PBIB2986E

65 G
(PHASE)
1.0 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB2987E

BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T models)
Park/Neutral position (PNP) (11 - 14V)
69 L • Shift lever: Neutral (M/T models)
signal
Approximately 0V
• Except above position
Sensor power supply
72 V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Warm-up condition EC
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed
7 - 10V
Intake valve timing control C
73 P
solenoid valve [Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
D
PBIA4937J
Sensor power supply E

74 W (Refrigerant pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
Sensor power supply F
75 BR [Crankshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
G
78 O [Camshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(PHASE)]
83 P CAN communication line — —
H
84 L CAN communication line — —
88 LG DATA link connector — —
[Ignition switch: OFF] I
Approximately 0V
• Clutch pedal: Fully released
92 G Clutch switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V) J
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
93 O Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) K
Approximately 0V
• Brake pedal: Fully released
99 R Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE L
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V)
Sensor power supply
102 SB (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V M
sensor 2)
• Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released N
Accelerator pedal position
103 GR
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed O
104 Y (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor 2) • Idle speed P
BATTERY VOLTAGE
105 G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
(11 - 14V)
Sensor power supply
106 P (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
108 B ECM ground Body ground
• Idle speed

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Accelerator pedal position • Accelerator pedal: Fully released
110 G
111 R (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor 1) • Idle speed
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) INFOID:0000000006029218
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function

ECU Identification ECM part number can be read.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self Diagnostic Result
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data Monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts
Active Test
some parameters in a specified range.
Function Test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the in-
Work Support
dications on the CONSULT-III unit.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE • FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure from
ING IDLING. fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN • THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT • THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing mixture ratio self-
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- learning value
FICIENT.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-14, "DTC No. Index".)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
A
Freeze frame data
Description
item*
• The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to EC
DTC RESULT
EC-14, "DTC No. Index".)
COOLANT TEMP
• The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
C
• “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than
short-term fuel trim.
D
• “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel sched-
ule.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] • The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
E
VEHICL SPEED
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
F
ABSOL TH·P/S [%] • The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
• The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
G
INT/A TEMP SE
• The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
• “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• One mode in the following is displayed.
H
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B1
Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control I
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE J
Monitored Item
K
Monitored item Unit Description Remarks
• Accuracy becomes poor if engine
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the speed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED rpm signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) • If the signal is interrupted while the L
and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain M
• The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is value is indicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1 V
displayed. • When engine is running, specification
range is indicated in “SPEC”.
N
• “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection
• When engine is running, specification
B/FUEL SCHDL msec pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any
learned on board correction.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain O
value is indicated.
• The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback cor- • When engine is running, specification
A/F ALPHA-B1 %
rection factor per cycle is indicated. range is indicated in “SPEC”.
• This data also includes the data for
P
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
• When the engine coolant temperature
• The engine coolant temperature (determined by sensor is open or short-circuited,
COOLAN TEMP/S °C or °F the signal voltage of the engine coolant tempera- ECM enters fail-safe mode. The en-
ture sensor) is displayed. gine coolant temperature determined
by the ECM is displayed.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
• The A/F signal computed from the input signal of
HO2S1 (B1) V
the heated oxygen sensor 1 is displayed.
• The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2
HO2S2 (B1) V
is displayed.
• Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal during • After turning ON the ignition switch,
air-fuel ratio feedback control: ″RICH″ is displayed until air-fuel mix-
RICH: means the mixture became ″rich″, and ture ratio feedback control begins.
HO2S1 MNTR(B1) RICH/LEAN
control is being affected toward a leaner mixture. • When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
LEAN: means the mixture became ″lean″, and clamped, the value just before the
control is being affected toward a rich mixture. clamping is displayed continuously.
• Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three
• When the engine is stopped, a certain
HO2S2 MNTR(B1) RICH/LEAN way catalyst is relatively small.
value is indicated.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three
way catalyst is relatively large.
• The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
VHCL SPEED SE km/h or mph speed signal sent from combination meter is dis-
played.
BATTERY VOLT V • The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
ACCEL SEN 1 • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
• The accelerator pedal position sensor signal volt-
V ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
ACCEL SEN 2 age is displayed.
ECM terminal voltage signal.
TP SEN 1-B1 • TP SEN 2-B1 signal is converted by
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage is dis-
TP SEN 2-B1 played.
• The intake air temperature (determined by the
INT/A TEMP SE °C or °F signal voltage of the intake air temperature sen-
sor) is indicated.
• Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed • After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
START SIGNAL ON/OFF by the ECM according to the signals of engine played regardless of the starter sig-
speed and battery voltage. nal.
• Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
CLSD THL POS ON/OFF ECM according to the accelerator pedal position
sensor signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condition-
AIR COND SIG ON/OFF er switch as determined by the air conditioner sig-
nal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neu-
P/N POSI SW ON/OFF
tral position (PNP) switch signal.
• [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system
PW/ST SIGNAL ON/OFF (determined by the signal sent from EPS control
unit) is indicated.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical
load signal.
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or
LOAD SIGNAL ON/OFF
lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and light-
ing switch are OFF.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch
IGNITION SW ON/OFF
signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan
HEATER FAN SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp
BRAKE SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width
INJ PULSE-B1 msec compensated by ECM according to the input sig-
computed value is indicated.
nals.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
• Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM • When the engine is stopped, a certain
IGN TIMING BTDC
according to the input signals. value is indicated.
• Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve control value computed by the EC
PURG VOL C/V % ECM according to the input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value in-
creases.
C
• Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advance an-
INT/V TIM(B1) °CA
gle.
• The control value of the intake valve timing con- D
trol solenoid valve (determined by ECM accord-
INT/V SOL(B1) ing to the input signals) is indicated.
%
• The advance angle becomes larger as the value
increases. E
• The air conditioner relay control condition (deter-
AIR COND RLY ON/OFF mined by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
F
• Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition
FUEL PUMP RLY ON/OFF determined by ECM according to the input sig-
nals.
G
• Indicates the throttle control motor relay control
THRTL RELAY ON/OFF condition determined by the ECM according to
the input signals.
• Indicates the condition of the cooling fan (deter- H
mined by ECM according to the input signals).
COOLING FAN HI/LOW/OFF HI: High speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation
I
OFF: Stop
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen
HO2S1 HTR (B1) ON/OFF sensor 1 heater determined by ECM according to
the input signals. J
the input signals. K
• Displays the condition of Idle Air Volume Learn-
ing
YET: Idle air volume learning has not been per- L
IDL A/V LEARN YET/CMPLT
formed yet.
CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has already
been performed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL km or mile • Distance traveled while MIL is activated. M
• Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control value
computed by ECM according to the input signals.
O2SEN HTR DTY %
• The current flow to the heater becomes larger as N
the value increases.
• The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure
AC PRESS SEN V
sensor is displayed. O
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE P
Test Item

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

• Engine: Return to the original
• Harness and connectors
trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
FUEL INJECTION • Fuel injector
• Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
• Heated oxygen sensor 1
tion using CONSULT-III.
trouble condition
If trouble symptom disappears, see • Perform Idle Air Volume Learn-
IGNITION TIMING • Timing light: Set
CHECK ITEM. ing.
• Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: After warming up, idle the • Harness and connectors
engine. • Compression
• A/C switch OFF • Fuel injector
POWER BALANCE Engine runs rough or dies.
• Shift lever: Neutral • Power transistor
• Cut off each fuel injector signal • Spark plug
one at a time using CONSULT-III. • Ignition coil
• Ignition switch: ON • Harness and connectors
COOLING FAN* • Turn the cooling fan “LOW”, “HI” Cooling fan moves and stops. • IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay)
and “OFF” CONSULT-III. • Cooling fan motor
• Engine: Return to the original • Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see • Engine coolant temperature
TEMP • Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sensor
perature using CONSULT-III. • Fuel injector
• Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
Fuel pump relay makes the operat- • Harness and connectors
FUEL PUMP RELAY • Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
ing sound. • Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-III
and listen to operating sound.
• Engine: After warming up, run en-
gine at 1,500 rpm.
• Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according • Harness and connectors
PURG VOL CONT/V
volume control solenoid valve to the opening percent. • Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-III.
V/T ASSIGN ANGLE • Intake valve timing control sole-
• Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM.
noid valve
CONSULT-III.
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-III while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000006029219
Remarks:
z Specification data are reference values.
z Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show
the specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIM-
ING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor
and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED • Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indication.
tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-65.
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-65.
A/F ALPHA-B1 See EC-65.
COOLAN TEMP/S • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S1 (B1) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm
1.0V
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met. EC
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B1) - Engine: After warming up
1.0V
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load
C
LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
D
are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) - Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at E
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
dication. speedometer indication.
F
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V G
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V
ACCEL SEN 2*
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V
H
• Ignition switch: ON
TP SEN 1-B1 Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
TP SEN 2-B1*
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
I
START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
CLSD THL POS • Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF J
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates.) K
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON
P/N POSI SW • Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
L
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
Rear window defogger switch: ON M
ON
and/or Lighting switch: 2nd
LOAD SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch and light-
OFF
ing switch: OFF N
IGNITION SW • Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
Clutch pedal: Fully released OFF
CLUTCH P/P SW • Ignition switch: ON O
Clutch pedal: Fully depressed ON
Heater fan: Operating ON
HEATER FAN SW • Ignition switch: ON
Heater fan: Not operating OFF
P
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
INJ PULSE-B1 • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T) 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• No load

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
• Engine: After warming up Idle 1 - 11°BTDC
IGN TIMING • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T) 2,000 rpm 25 - 45°BTDC
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
PURG VOL C/V • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T) 2,000 rpm 0 - 50%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5 - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1) • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T) 2,500 rpm Approx. 0 - 40°CA
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 0 - 2%
INT/V SOL (B1) • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T) 2,500 rpm Approx. 0 - 90%
• No load
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates)
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY • Engine running or cranking
• Except above conditions OFF
THRTL RELAY • Ignition switch: ON ON
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
OFF
(201°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN engine LOW
95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F)
HIGH
(212°F) or more
• Engine: After warming up
ON
HO2S1 HTR (B1) • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
• Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as the
VEHICLE SPEED
dication. speedometer indication
• Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80°C (176°F)
O2SEN HTR DTY Approx. 30%
• Engine speed: below 3,600 rpm
• Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch are ON (Compressor operates.)
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
A
Description INFOID:0000000006029220
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONI- EC
TOR” mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “SPEC”
of “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the
value in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have
one or more malfunctions. C
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light up the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: D
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correc-
tion)
• A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) E
Testing Condition INFOID:0000000006029221
F
• Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)
• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
• Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F) G
• Engine speed: Idle
• Transmission: Warmed-up
- A/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID H
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
- M/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
• Electrical load: Not applied
- Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight I
ahead.
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000006029222
J
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-28, "Basic Inspection". K
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
L
CONSULT-III.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-66, "Diagnosis Procedure". M

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006029223
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMBIA1419GB

EC
PBIB3213E
DETAILED PROCEDURE P
1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-65, "Testing Condition".
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
NOTE:

Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is
out of the SP value even a little.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3.
2.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
3. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6.
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
dition.
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
Check fuel pressure.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".
GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
1. Check the following.
- Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
- Clogged fuel filter
- Fuel pump and its circuit
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 8. A
1. Start engine. EC
the SP value.
OK or NG
C
NG >> GO TO 9.
9.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST D
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F

- Ignition coil and its circuit
- Fuel injector and its circuit G
- Intake air leakage
- Low compression pressure
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. H
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.) Refer to EM-28,
"Component".
I
>> GO TO 11.
J
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG K
NG >> GO TO 12.
L
12.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
2. Select “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, in “DATA MONITOR” mode. M
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.),
check that the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
N
1 time : RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times : RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT P
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 and its circuit.
>> GO TO 14.
1. Start engine.

the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15.
15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
>> GO TO 16.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-39, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
SP value.
OK or NG
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
- Engine oil level is too high
- Engine oil viscosity
- Belt tension of alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
- Noise from engine
- Noise from transmission, etc.
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
- Valve clearance malfunction
- Intake valve timing control function malfunction
- Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.

19.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.
20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR A

1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
EC
>> GO TO 22.
22.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” C
1. Start engine.
the SP value. D
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it.
2. GO TO 29. E
NG >> GO TO 23.
23.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
F
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor (refer to EM-16, "Component"), and then GO
TO 29.
H
24.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-211, "ECM I
4. Perform Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.
5. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning. J
>> GO TO 29.
K
• Crushed air ducts L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 27.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26. N
SP value. O
OK or NG
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27. P
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.

NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor (refer to EM-16, "Component"), and then GO
TO 30.
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
• Looseness of oil filler cap
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
• Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
• Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts
• Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that
OK or NG
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and then make sure that the indication is
within the SP value.
OK or NG

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function EC
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent
incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may C
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation D
2 The CONSULT-III is used. The Self Diagnostic Result screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
3 or 4 The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
E
5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
F
1.INSPECTION START
G
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-24, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
>> GO TO 2. H
2.CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to EC-77, "Ground Inspection". I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
J
NG >> Repair or replace.
3.SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-16, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident", “INCIDENT SIMULATION K
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END L

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000006029226
AABWA0140GB
1.INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No A
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I EC
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 93 and ground with CON-
C
SULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage

D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. E
PBIA9561J
F
• Harness connectors M69, E7 G
• 10 A fuse (No. 6)
• Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
H
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15 and E24. Refer to EC-77, "Ground Inspection".
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
5.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I K
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 10, 11, 108 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. L
Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. N
Check the following. O
• Harness connectors F8, E8
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
P
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> Check “Ignition control system” circuit.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB2658E
8.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 105 and ground with
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery

voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop
to approximately 0 V.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO PBIB3037E
11.
9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
SULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIA9562J
10.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E43.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 105 and IPDM E/R terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI

Continuity should exist. A

OK or NG
EC
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
12.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART C
• Harness or connectors E8, F8
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
D
13.CHECK 20 A FUSE E
1. Disconnect 20 A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20 A fuse.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace 20 A fuse.
14.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS G
Check ground connection E15 and E24. Refer to EC-77, "Ground Inspection".
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 15.
15.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II I

Refer to Wiring Diagram. J

K
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. L
NG >> GO TO 16.
Check the following. M
• Harness or connectors F8, E8
N
17.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
O
Refer to EC-73.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". P
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Ground Inspection INFOID:0000000006029228
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.

Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
• Remove the ground bolt or screw.
• Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
• Clean as required to assure good contact.
• Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
• Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
• If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eye-
let make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
PBIB1870E

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000006029230
D
The MIL will not light up for these self-diagnoses.
E
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
• When ECM is not transmitting or receiving
U1000
CAN communication signal of OBD (emission- • Harness or connectors F
1000
related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. (CAN communication line is open or
CAN communication
• When ECM is not transmitting or receiving shorted)
line
U1001 CAN communication signal other than OBD (Refer to LAN-26, "CAN System Specifi-
G
1001 (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or cation Chart")
more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000006029231

H
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds.

2. Check 1st trip DTC. I
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, check possible cause items.

BBWA2672E

DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION
A
D
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
U1010 When detecting error during the initial diagno-
CAN communication bus • ECM
1010 sis for CAN controller of each control unit.
F
1. Turn ignition switch ON. G

2. Check 1st trip DTC.
H

DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
MBIB1560E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
name
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P0011 Intake valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
0011 control performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
• Timing chain installation
• Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for in-
take valve timing control
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters in fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function

A
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE: EC
• If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111. See EC-
108.
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. C
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle. D
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
E
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
F
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLANT TEMPS More than 60°C (140°F) G
A/T: P or N position
Shift lever
M/T: Neutral position
4. Let engine idle for 10 seconds. H
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
6. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds. I

COOLANT TEMPS 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
J
Shift lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
K
Driving location (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
L
Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000006029239
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the intake valve timing control system. During this check, a M
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. N
O
4. Set the tester probe between ECM terminal 73 (IVT control solenoid valve signal) and ground.
5. Start engine and let it idle.
6. Check the voltage under the following conditions. P

Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
Conditions Voltage
BATTERY VOLTAGE
At idle
(11 - 14V)
7V - 10V
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm PBIB3036E
PBIA4937J
7. If NG, check possible cause items.

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
A
Component Description INFOID:0000000006029240
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It EC
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater C
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The D
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J E
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. F
Trouble diagnosis
name
G
• Harness or connectors
P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 circuit low input to ECM. • Intake air leaks
• Mass air flow sensor H
P0103 Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0103 circuit high input sent to ECM.
• Mass air flow sensor I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
J
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
K
NOTE: L
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102 M
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, check possible cause items. N
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. O
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, check possible cause items.
If DTC is not detected, go to next step. P
5. Check DTC.

BBWA2678E

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
A
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine EC

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther- C
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
°C (°F)
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 38 (Engine
SEF012P
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: I
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
J
Trouble Diagnosis K
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
Name
Engine coolant tem-
P0117 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
perature sensor cir- L
0117 sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
cuit low input
Engine coolant tem- • Engine coolant temperature sensor
P0118 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
perature sensor cir- M
0118 sent to ECM.
cuit high input
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected. N

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following conditions. O
CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-III display) P
Engine coolant temperature Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
sensor circuit Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting 80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.

NOTE:

EC
BBWA2680E
P

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in
response to driving conditions via the throttle control motor.
PBIB0145E
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

NOTE:
If DTC P0122 or P0123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229.
Refer to EC-126.
P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors
0122 2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
0123 2 circuit high input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.

EC
ALBWA0140GB
P

DTC P0132 HO2S1
DTC P0132 HO2S1
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.
PBIB1848E
P0132 Heated oxygen sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the sensor
0132 circuit high voltage is sent to ECM.
NOTE:
3. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.

DTC P0132 HO2S1
A
EC
P
AABWA0463GB

DTC P0134 HO2S1
DTC P0134 HO2S1

approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is

not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately
0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is
within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks
that this time is not inordinately long.
SEF237U
P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The voltage from the sensor is constantly ap-
0134 circuit no activity detected prox. 0.3V.
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III, and select “HO2S1 (B1)”.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load.

DTC P0134 HO2S1
4. Make sure that “HO2S1 (B1)” indication does not remain in the range between 0.2V to 0.4V.
5. If NG, check possible cause items. A
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 49 (HO2S1 signal) and ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load. C
• The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 to 0.4V.
D
PBIA9566J

DTC P0138 HO2S2
DTC P0138 HO2S2
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during
the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB1848E
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.

DTC P0138 HO2S2
EC
AABWA0465GB
P


PBIB0145E

NOTE:
Refer to EC-126.
P0222 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 • Harness or connectors
0222 1 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 • Electric throttle control actuator
0223 1 circuit high input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

degrees.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

EC
AABWA0468GB
P

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
The knock sensor (1) is attached to the cylinder block. It senses

engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pres-
sure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
• : Vehicle front
PBIB2969E
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause
P0327 Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0327 input sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Knock sensor
0328 input sent to ECM.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
EC
BBWA2683E
P

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at
the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine rev-
olution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
PBIA9209J
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
PBIB2997E
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not
circuit is open or shorted.]
detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of
(Accelerator pedal position sensor
engine cranking.
circuit is shorted.]
P0335 Crankshaft position sen- • The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit
0335 sor (POS) circuit sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is
is shorted.]
running.
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
the normal pattern during engine running.
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
• Signal plate
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

EC
AABWA0469GB
P

DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of

camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
PBIA9875J
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
PBIB2997E
NOTE:
If DTC P0340 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-126.
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for
the first few seconds during engine cranking.
P0340 Camshaft position sensor • The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM dur-
• Camshaft (Intake)
0340 (PHASE) circuit ing engine running.
• Starter motor (Refer to SC-8.)
• The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
• Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-8.)
pattern during engine running.
• Dead (Weak) battery
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
4. Start engine and maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.

EC
BBWA2685E
P

DTC P0605 ECM
DTC P0605 ECM
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIA9222J
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. • ECM
0605
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A
degrees) by the return spring.
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no problem on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B,
perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, check possible cause items
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
3. Repeat step 1 and 2 for 32 times.

DTC P1065 ECM
DTC P1065 ECM
A
ECM has the memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio EC
feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Volume Learning
value memory, etc. even when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
C
PBIA9222J E
F
P1065* ECM back-up RAM system does not function
Engine control module • ECM G
1065 properly.
*: This self-diagnosis is not for ECM power supply circuit, even though “ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000006029284 H
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
1. Turn ignition switch ON wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 minutes
3. Turn ignition switch ON, wait at least 10 seconds. J
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 for five times.
K

DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM • Harness or connectors
P1111 Intake valve timing control
through intake valve timing control solenoid (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
1111 solenoid valve circuit
valve. • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC
AABWA0470GB
P

DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
P1121 Electric throttle control
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is • Electric throttle control actuator
1121 actuator B)
not in specified range.
C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
FAIL-SAFE MODE

The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T) and engine speed will not exceed
1,000 rpm or more.
NOTE:
• Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
1. Turn ignition witch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 3 seconds.
3. Shift selector lever to P position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T).
8. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.

4. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds. A
EC

DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or P1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121
or P1126. Refer to EC-110 or EC-114.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
1122 performance ate properly. shorted)
• Electric throttle control actuator
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine
is running.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
3. Check DTC.

EC
ALBWA0129GB
P

DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1124 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)
• Throttle control motor relay
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

spring.
NOTE:
2. Check DTC.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
3. Check DTC.

EC
ALBWA0130GB
P

DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
1128 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. • Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

spring.
NOTE:
3. Check DTC.

EC
ALBWA0131GB
P

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
System Description INFOID:0000000006029304
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-79.
• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-81.
Cooling Fan Control
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1
Battery Battery voltage*1

Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R
control (Cooling fan relays)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
PBIB2852E
Cooling Fan Relay Operation

The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.
Cooling fan relay (built-in IPDM E/R)

Cooling fan speed Cooling fan relay*2
1 2 3*1
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF ON OFF
High (HI) ON ON ON ON
*1: For Mauritius
*2: Except for Mauritius

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor-1 as follows.
EC
Cooling fan motor-1 terminals
Cooling fan speed
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4 C
2 3 and 4
Low (LOW)
1 and 2 3
D
1 and 2 4
High (HI) 1 and 2 3 and 4

E
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction F
is indicated.
G
(The cooling fan circuit is open or short- H
• Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over- ed.)
heat). • Cooling fan
• Cooling fan system does not operate properly • IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays)
P1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat). • Radiator hose I
1217 (Overheat) • Engine coolant was not added to the system • Radiator
using the proper filling method. • Radiator cap
• Engine coolant is not within the specified • Water pump
range. • Thermostat J
For more information, refer to EC-123,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating".
CAUTION: K
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-7, "Changing Engine
Coolant". Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-20, "ENGINE OIL : Changing Engine Oil".
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
L
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to CO-7, "Changing Engine Coolant".
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
M
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
N
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up O
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-III
P

1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and check possible
cause items.
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and check possible
cause items.
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-III. SEF621W
5. If the results are NG, check possible cause items.

WITHOUT CONSULT-III
the proper range, skip the following steps and check possible
cause items.
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and check possible
cause items.
3. Start engine.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine. SEF621W
4. Set temperature control switch to full cold position.

5. Turn air conditioner switch ON.
6. Turn blower fan switch ON.
7. Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner operating.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
8. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
If NG, check possible cause items or
If OK, go to the following step.
10. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
11. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
12. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
MBIB0651E
13. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
higher speed than low speed.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
SEF023R

EC
BBWA2997E
P

ALBWA0132GB

Main 12 Causes of Overheating INFOID:0000000006029308
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard

OFF 1 • Blocked radiator • Visual No blocking EC
• Blocked condenser
• Blocked radiator grille
• Blocked bumper
C
2 • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture
3 • Coolant level • Visual Coolant up to MAX level in reservoir
tank and radiator filler neck
D
4 • Radiator cap • Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa
(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9
- 14 psi) (Limit)
E
ON*2 5 • Coolant leaks • Visual No leaks
ON*2 6 • Thermostat • Touch the upper and lower ra- Both hoses should be hot
diator hoses F
ON* 1 7 • Cooling fan • CONSULT-III Operating
OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak • Color checker chemical tester Negative

4 Gas analyzer G
ON*3 9 • Coolant temperature gauge • Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when driving
• Coolant overflow to reservoir tank • Visual No overflow during driving and
idling H
OFF*4 10 • Coolant return from reservoir tank • Visual Should be initial level in reservoir
to radiator tank
OFF 11 • Cylinder head • Straight gauge feeler gauge 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distor- I
tion (warping)
12 • Cylinder block and pistons • Visual No scuffing on cylinder walls or pis-
ton J
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. K
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR

PBIB0145E
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
P1225 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- • Electric throttle control actuator
1225 learning performance sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, EC

a kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position C
these signals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in D
PBIB0145E E
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. F
P1226 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- • Electric throttle control actuator G
1226 learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000006029314 H
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times.
4. Check 1st trip DTC. K
L

DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
Trouble diagnosis
name
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(Throttle position sensor circuit is shorted.)
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM detects a voltage of power source for [Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is
1229 circuit short sensor is excessively low or high. shorted.]
• Throttle position sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE

spring.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

EC
ALBWA0133GB
P

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
When the shift lever position is P or N, transmission range switch is ON. (A/T)
When the shift lever position is Neutral, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. (M/T)
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) [Park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit
P1706
Park/neutral position switch signal is not changed in the process of engine is open or shorted.]
1706
starting and driving. • Transmission range switch (A/T)
• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T)
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” sig-
nal under the following conditions.
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal

N or P position (A/T)
ON
Neutral position (M/T)
Except above position OFF
If NG, check possible cause items.
If OK, go to following steps.
ENG SPEED A/T: 1,650 - 6,000 rpm

M/T: 1,500 - 6,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL A/T: More than 3.5 msec
M/T: More than 2.8 msec
VHCL SPEED SE More than 46km/h (29 MPH)
Shift lever Suitable position
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 69 (PNP signal) and body
ground under the following conditions. A
Condition (Gear position) Voltage (Known-good data)

P or N position (A/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE EC
Neutral position (M/T) (11 - 14V)
Except above position Approx. 0
C
PBIA9570J

AABWA0471GB

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
A
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. EC
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
C
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause D
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for • Harness or connectors
P1805
Brake switch extremely long time while the vehicle is driv- (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
1805
ing. • Stop lamp switch
E
Fail-Safe Mode INFOID:0000000006029325
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. F
Engine operation condition in fail-fail safe mode

ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. G
Vehicle condition Driving condition
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000006029326 I

2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. J
3. Erase the DTC.
4. Check DTC.
K

ALBWA0135GB

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
A
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end EC

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal C
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signals to the ECM.
The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on D
these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The
ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
PBIB1741E E
F
NOTE:
Refer to EC-126. G
H
P2122 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP • Harness or connectors
2122 sensor 1 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
P2123 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP • Accelerator pedal position sensor
2123 sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1) I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. J

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 K
degrees.
L
NOTE: M
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. N
2. Check DTC.
O

ALBWA0136GB

A

these signals.
PBIB1741E E
F
G
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
is shorted.] H
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP shorted.)
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. • Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2) I
J
FAIL-SAFE MODE
K
degrees.
L

M
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. N
TESTING CONDITION:
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. O
2. Check DTC.
P

AABWA0472GB

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
A

a kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position C
these signals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in D
PBIB0145E E
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. F

NOTE:
EC-126.
G
• Harness or connector H
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or short-
P2135 Throttle position sensor
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 ed.)
2135 circuit range/performance
and TP sensor 2. • Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2) I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
J

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 K
degrees.
L
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at M
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. N
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, check possible cause items. O

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
ALBWA0141GB

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
A

these signals.
PBIB1741E E
F
NOTE:
EC-126. G
H
• Harness or connector
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit I
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM is shorted.]
P2138
tion sensor circuit range/ compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
2138
performance and APP sensor 2. shorted.)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor J
(APP sensor 1 and 2)
K
FAIL-SAFE MODE
L
degrees. M
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000006029342 N
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at O
TESTING CONDITION:
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. P
2. Check DTC.

AABWA0473GB

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
A
The refrigerant pressure sensor (1) is installed at the condenser of EC

the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
• : Vehicle front C
BBIA0713E E
H
PBIB2657E

BBWA2705E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire A
Item Condition Data (DC Voltage)
nal No. Color
[Engine is running]
41 GR Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0 V EC
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground C
48 BR • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
74 W [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
(Refrigerant pressure sensor) D
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION E

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
F
SULT-III or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0 V G

OK or NG
H
NG >> GO TO 2.
I
PBIA9574J

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF. J
2. Stop engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-251, "Ground Inspection". K
BBIA0698E
N
: Vehicle front
1. Body ground E24 2. Engine ground F9 3. Engine ground F16
O
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. P
3.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor (1) harness connector.
- : Vehicle front
BBIA0713E
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3

and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5 V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF479Y

• Harness connectors E8, F8
• Harness for open or short between refrigerant pressure sensor and ECM
5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 48.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
7.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8. A
EC
C
Refer to EC-245. D
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. Refer to ATC-110, "Component" (AUTOMATIC AIR CONDI-
TIONER) or MTC-78, "Component" (MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER). E
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006029347
F
Refer to ATC-117, "Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" (ATC) or MTC-85, "Removal and
Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" (MTC). G

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure INFOID:0000000006029348
Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000006029349
A/T No load* (in P or N position) 700 ± 50 rpm

Target idle speed
M/T No load* (in Neutral position) 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T In P or N position 700 rpm or more
Air conditioner: ON
M/T In Neutral position 750 rpm or more
A/T In P or N position
Ignition timing 6 ± 5° BTDC
M/T In Neutral position
*: Under the following conditions:
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000006029350
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

Output voltage at idle 1.0 - 1.3*V
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000006029351
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 0.283 - 0.359
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000006029352
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater INFOID:0000000006029353
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.4 - 4.4Ω
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater INFOID:0000000006029354
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.4 - 4.4Ω
Throttle Control Motor INFOID:0000000006029355
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω

Fuel Injector INFOID:0000000006029356
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 10.4 - 15.3Ω

EC
Fuel Pump INFOID:0000000006029357
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω C

INDEX FOR DTC
< SERVICE INFORMATION > [MR18DE]
SERVICE INFORMATION
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC No. Index INFOID:0000000006029358
DTC*1
Items
CONSULT-III Reference page
ECM*3
GST*2
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
No DTC Flashing*5 FURTHER TESTING EC-184
MAY BE REQUIRED.
U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-252
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-252

U1010 1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) EC-254
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-255
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-266
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-266
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 EC-275
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 EC-275
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) EC-280
P0133 0133 HO2S1 (B1) EC-287
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) EC-296
P0135 0135 HO2S1 HTR (B1) EC-302
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-307
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-312
P0141 0141 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-320
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-325
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 EC-331
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 EC-337
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 EC-337
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-342
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-342
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-352
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-358

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*3
GST*2
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-363 EC
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-368
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 EC-374
C
P0605 0605 ECM EC-376
P0705 0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A AT-92
P0710 0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A AT-97 D
P0720 0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR*6 AT-103
P0731 0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-115
E
P0734 0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-124 F
P0740 0740 TORQUE CONVERTER AT-129
P0744 0744 TORQUE CONVERTER AT-134
P0745 0745 PC SOLENOID A AT-139 G
P0750 0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A AT-144
P0755 0755 SHIFT SOLENOID B AT-149
H
P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-378
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR EC-383
P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC EC-385 I
J
P1128 1128 ETC MOT EC-395
P1143 1143 HO2S1 (B1) EC-400
P1144 1144 HO2S1 (B1) EC-405 K
P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) EC-410
P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) EC-418
L
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-426
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING-B1 EC-438 M
P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-440
P1610 1610 LOCK MODE BL-215
P1611 1611 ID DISCORD,IMMU-ECM BL-215
N
P1612 1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU BL-215
P1614 1614 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY BL-215
O
P1615 1615 DIFFERENCE OF KEY BL-215
P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-445
P1715 1715 IN PULLY SPEED EC-450 P
P1760 1760 OVER CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-154
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-451

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR-B1 EC-467
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-472
*2: This number is prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
*5: When engine is running, MIL may flash. For details, refer to EC-184, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)".
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
Alphabetical Index INFOID:0000000006029359
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 EC-472
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 EC-451
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 EC-252
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 EC-252

CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU P1612 1612 BL-215
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY P1614 1614 BL-215
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-352
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 EC-358
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) U1010 1010 EC-254
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 EC-342
DIFFERENCE OF KEY P1615 1615 BL-215
ECM P0605 0605 EC-376
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-426
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 EC-383
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 EC-385
ETC MOT P1128 1128 EC-395

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*3
GST*2
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 EC-391 EC
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 EC-325
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 EC-331
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A P0710 0710 AT-97 C
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 EC-280
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 EC-287
D
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 EC-296
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 EC-400
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 EC-405 E
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 0135 EC-302
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-307
F
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 EC-312
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 EC-410
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 EC-418 G
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 0141 EC-320
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0112 0112 EC-266
H
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0113 0113 EC-266
ID DISCORD,IMMU-ECM P1611 1611 BL-215
IN PULLY SPEED P1715 1715 EC-450 I
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 EC-255
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 EC-378
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 EC-348 J
LOCK MODE P1610 1610 BL-215
K
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 EC-342 L
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING No DTC Flashing*5 EC-184
MAY BE REQUIRED. M
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
N
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR*6 P0720 0720 AT-103
OVER CLUTCH SOLENOID P1760 1760 AT-154
PC SOLENOID A P0745 0745 AT-139 O
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 EC-445
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 EC-368
P
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 EC-440
SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 0750 AT-144
SHIFT SOLENOID B P0755 0755 AT-149
T/M RANGE SENSOR A P0705 0705 AT-92
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 0740 AT-129

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 0744 AT-134
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0222 0222 EC-337
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0223 0223 EC-337
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0122 0122 EC-275
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0123 0123 EC-275
TP SENSOR-B1 P2135 2135 EC-467
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 EC-363
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 EC-374

1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 0731 AT-115
*2: This number is prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
*5: When engine is running, MIL may flash. For details, refer to EC-184, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)".
*6: When the fail-safe operation for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.

PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
A
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
EC
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of C
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by D
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag E
Module, see the SRS section.
F
ness connectors.
WARNING: G
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni-
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing H
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
I
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000006029361
NOTE: J
• This Procedure is applied only to models with Intelligent Key system and NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYS-
TEM).
• Remove and install all control units after disconnecting both battery cables with the ignition knob in the
K
″LOCK″ position.
• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work.
If DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnostic results.
For models equipped with the Intelligent Key system and NATS, an electrically controlled steering lock mech- L
anism is adopted on the key cylinder.
For this reason, if the battery is disconnected or if the battery is discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
steering wheel rotation will become impossible. M
If steering wheel rotation is required when battery power is interrupted, follow the procedure below before
starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE N
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged. O
2. Use the Intelligent Key or mechanical key to turn the ignition switch to the ″ACC″ position. At this time, the
steering lock will be released.
3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released and the steering wheel can be P
rotated.
4. Perform the necessary repair operation.
5. When the repair work is completed, return the ignition switch to the ″LOCK″ position before connecting
the battery cables. (At this time, the steering lock mechanism will engage.)
6. Perform a self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000006029362
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield.
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and A/T INFOID:0000000006029363
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-63.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution INFOID:0000000006029364

running.
turned OFF.
connect negative battery cable.
SEF289H

the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly in this case. However, this
is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts
because of a slight variation.
PBIA9222J
- Freeze frame data
PRECAUTIONS
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values A
• When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten (B) it
securely with a lever (1) as far as it will go as shown in the fig-
ure.
EC
- ECM (2)
- Loosen (A)
D
PBIB2947E
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or E

break).
terminal, when connecting pin connectors. F
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam- G
age to ICs.
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal- H
PBIB0090E
of ICs, etc.
• Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference I
Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-222, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value".
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. J
• Do not disassembly mass air flow sensor.
• Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious K
incidents.
• Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS). L
MEF040D

Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. M
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed. N
SAT652J
P

PRECAUTIONS
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow
damage the ECM power transistor.
SEF348N

- Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (1)
- Fuel pressure regulator (2)
- Fuel level sensor (3)
- Fuel tank temperature sensor (4)
BBIA0704E

ily.
SEF709Y

PRECAUTIONS
observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic A
trol units.
EC
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave C
radio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000006029365
Tool number
Description
Tool name
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor
Heated oxygen sensor with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
wrench
S-NT379
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor

Heated oxygen sensor a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
wrench
S-NT636
EG17650301 Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and ra-

Radiator cap tester diator filler neck
adapter a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564

Break-out box
ZZA1194D

Y-cable adapter
PBIA9379J

Fuel tube adapter
PBIB3043E

PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000006029366

Quick connector re- Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine EC
lease room
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG: Part
No. 16441 6N210)
C
PBIC0198E D
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
E
F
S-NT653

ture sensor G
S-NT705
I
cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco- J
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
K
AEM488

L
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica-
tion MIL-A-907)
M
S-NT779

Schematic INFOID:0000000006029367
JSBIA0177GB
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System INFOID:0000000006029368
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator A

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
EC
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas C
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Fuel injection D
Park/neutral position (PNP) signal Gear position
& mixture ratio Fuel injector
Battery Battery voltage*3 control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition E

EPS control unit Power steering operation*2
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

F
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Vehicle speed*2
Combination meter G
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of I
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor. J
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below. K
<Fuel increase>
• During warm-up L
• When starting the engine
• During acceleration
• Hot-engine operation
• When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models) M
• High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
• During deceleration N
• During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
O
PBIB2953E

The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for drivability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about
heated oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-287. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric
(ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of heated oxygen sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
• Deceleration and acceleration
• Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit
• Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
• High engine coolant temperature
• During warm-up
• After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared
to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an
increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.

This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
A
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
EC
Electronic Ignition (EI) System INFOID:0000000006029369
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART C

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 D
E

Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Ignition timing
Power transistor F
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) signal Gear position G
Vehicle speed*1
Combination meter H
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I
Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. J
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in K
the ECM.
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle L
• At low battery voltage
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed M
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
N
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) INFOID:0000000006029370
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART O

Park/neutral position (PNP) signal Neutral position P
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Fuel cut control Fuel injector
Engine speed
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Vehicle speed*
Combination meter Vehicle speed*

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 2,000 rpm under no load [for example, the selector lever position is P or N (A/T),
Neutral (M/T) and engine speed is over 2,000 rpm] fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the
fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-160, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) Sys-
tem".

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
A
Input/Output Signal Chart INFOID:0000000006029371
EC
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position C
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature D

Air conditioner
Air conditioner relay
Battery Battery voltage*2 cut control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure E
EPS control unit 1
Power steering operation*
Vehicle speed*1 F
Combination meter
G
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. H
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
I
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low. J
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Refer to LAN-26, "CAN System Specification Chart", about CAN communication for detail.

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC
G
PBIB3039E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel H
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
I
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. J
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING K

PBIB3345E
: From next figure

1. EVAP canister purge volume control 2. Intake manifold collector 3. EVAP purge resonator
solenoid valve
NOTE:

EC
H
BBIA0935E
: Vehicle front : To previous figure

I
1. EVAP canister
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006029375
J
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port (B). K
2. Blow air into port (A) and check that it flows freely out of port (C).
3. Release blocked port (B).
L
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port (B) and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports (A) and (C).
5. Block port (A) and (B).
M
6. Apply pressure to port (C) and check that there is no leakage.
PBIB2961E
N
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
O
SEF918W

2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar,

0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.4 kPa (−0.060 to −0.034 bar,
−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.49 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
SEF943S
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-373, "Component Inspection".

NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
A
• If the security indicator illuminates with the ignition switch ON or DTC P1610 - P1615 is displayed in EC
“SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT” mode, perform the trouble diagnosis for corresponding to the
detected DTC. Refer to EC-148, "DTC No. Index".
• Check that no DTC is displayed in “SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT” mode of “BCM” before erasing the
detected DTC in “ENGINE” mode with CONSULT-III. C
• When replacing ECM, refer to EC-198, "Procedure After Replacing ECM".

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB2962E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV
valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes
through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
PBIB1588E
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through A
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
EC
PBIB1589E
D
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose E
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277

Introduction INFOID:0000000006029379
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Freeze Frame data —
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
Permanent Diagnostic Trouble Code (Permanent DTC) Service $0A* of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
*: Service $0A* is not applied for regions where it is not mandated.

The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze

DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value
data Frame data
CONSULT-III × × × × × —
GST × × × — × ×
ECM × ×* — — — —
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-208,
"Fail-Safe Chart".)
Two Trip Detection Logic INFOID:0000000006029380
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC

1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
up up ing
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst

damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
One trip detection diagnoses (Re-
fer to EC-175, "Emission-related — × — — × — — —
Diagnostic Information".)
Except above — — — × — × × —

malfunction on engine control system. A
EC
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut C
Emission-related Diagnostic Information INFOID:0000000006029381
D
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
DTC*1 E
Items Reference
CONSULT-III SRT code Trip MIL
ECM*3
GST*2
1 (A/T) × (A/T) F
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 —
2 (M/T) — (M/T)
EC-252
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 — 2 — EC-252

G
1 (A/T) × (A/T)
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 — EC-254
2 (M/T) — (M/T)
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — Flashing*5 EC-184 H
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — 2 — EC-255
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0102 0102 — 1 × EC-259 I
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0103 0103 — 1 × EC-259
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0112 0112 — 2 × EC-266
J
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0113 0113 — 2 × EC-266
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — 1 × EC-270
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — 1 × EC-270 K
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0122 0122 — 1 × EC-275
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0123 0123 — 1 × EC-275
L
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 — 2 × EC-280
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 × 2 × EC-287
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 — 2 × EC-296 M
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 0135 × 2 × EC-302
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 — 2 × EC-307
N
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × 2 × EC-312
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 0141 × 2 × EC-320
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — 2 × EC-325 O
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — 2 × EC-331
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0222 0222 — 1 × EC-337
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0223 0223 — 1 × EC-337
P
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — 1 or 2 × EC-342

CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — 1 or 2 × EC-342

DTC*1
Items Reference
ECM*3
GST*2
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — 2 — EC-348
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — 2 — EC-348
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — 2 × EC-352
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — 2 × EC-358
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × 2 × EC-363
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — 2 × EC-368
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 — 2 × EC-374

ECM P0605 0605 — 1 or 2 × or — EC-376
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — 2 × AT-92
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A P0710 0710 — 2 × AT-97
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR*6 P0720 0720 — 2 × AT-103

1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 0731 — 2 × AT-115
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 0740 — 2 × AT-129
TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 0744 — 2 × AT-134
PC SOLENOID A P0745 0745 — 2 × AT-139
SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 0750 — 1 × AT-144
SHIFT SOLENOID B P0755 0755 — 1 × AT-149
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — 2 × EC-378
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — 1 × EC-383
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — 1 × EC-385
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — 1 × EC-391
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — 1 × EC-391
ETC MOT P1128 1128 — 1 × EC-395
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 × 2 × EC-400
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 × 2 × EC-405
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × 2 × EC-410
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × 2 × EC-418
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — 1 × EC-426
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1225 1225 — 2 — EC-436
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1226 1226 — 2 — EC-438
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — 1 × EC-440
LOCK MODE P1610 1610 — 2 — BL-215
ID DISCORD,IMMU-ECM P1611 1611 — 2 — BL-215
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU P1612 1612 — 2 — BL-215
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY P1614 1614 — 2 — BL-215
DIFFERENCE OF KEY P1615 1615 — 2 — BL-215
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — 2 × EC-445
IN PULLY SPEED P1715 1715 — 2 — EC-450
OVER CLUTCH SOLENOID P1760 1760 — 2 × AT-154

DTC*1
Items Reference A
ECM*3
GST*2
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — 2 — EC-451 EC
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — 1 × EC-455
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — 1 × EC-455
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — 1 × EC-460 C
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — 1 × EC-460
TP SENSOR-B1 P2135 2135 — 1 × EC-467
D
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — 1 × EC-472
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6. E
*5: When engine is running, MIL may flash. For details, refer to EC-184, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)". F
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic G
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not recur, the 1st trip DTC
will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not H
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec- I
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. J
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in "HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR-
K
MATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/compo-
nent. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-III.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without light-
ing up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not L
prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-203, "Trouble Diagnosis Introduction". Then per- M
form DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the mal-
function is duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC N
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-III
With GST
O
CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0740, P1217, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5.
(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools P
Example: 0340, 0740, 1217, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST and the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-

mal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if
available) is recommended.
DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-III.
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-228, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)".
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:

If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and A
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. EC
SRT item Performance Corresponding

Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
(CONSULT-III indication) Priority* DTC No.
C
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420
HO2S 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0133
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1143 D
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1144
E
HO2S HTR 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater P0135 F
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0141
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-III. G
SRT Set Timing
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and H
is shown in the table below.
Example I
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) J
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
K
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) L
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
M
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG N
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC O
DTC (= MIL ON)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. P
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above

If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
• The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
• When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
JMBIA1575GB
How to Display SRT Code

WITH CONSULT-III

Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose A
SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
WITH GST EC
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
How to Set SRT Code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each C
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-III
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table D
on "SRT Item".
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
E
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

Driving Pattern
PBIB3645E
• The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving
habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the short-
est.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within
zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:

• Sea level
• Flat road A
• Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagno-
EC
sis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
• The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 38 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3 V). C
• The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 38 and ground is lower than 1.4 V).
Pattern 2: D
• When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h E
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
F
Suggested Transmission Gear Position
Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-III) G
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the H
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.
I
Test value
SRT item Self-diagnostic test item DTC (GST display) Test limit
TID CID J
P0420 01H 81H Min.
CATALYST Three way catalyst function
P0420 02H 81H Min.
K
P0133 09H 04H Max.
P1143 0AH 84H Min.
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1144 0BH 04H Max. L
P0132 0CH 04H Max.
HO2S P0134 0DH 04H Max.
M
P0139 19H 86H Min.
P1147 1AH 86H Min.
P1146 1BH 06H Max. N
P0138 1CH 06H Max.
29H 08H Max.
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater P0135 O
2AH 88H Min.
HO2S HTR
2DH 0AH Max.
2EH 8AH Min. P
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
WITH CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.

• If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-148), skip step 1.
1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to AT-39.
2. Select "ENGINE" with CONSULT-III.
3. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS".
4. Touch "ERASE". (DTC in ECM will be erased.)
WITH GST
NOTE:
1. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
1. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS).
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
- Freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000006029382
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, check MIL circuit. Refer to DI-20 or
see EC-505.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SAT652J
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.

Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. A

Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
EC
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped C
D
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is de-
WARNING tected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip de-
tection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a
malfunction has been detected.
E
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
• Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
F
• One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
G
Engine stopped H
I
Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or rich),
MONITOR monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read.
malfunction on engine control system.
K
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the L
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut M
MIL Flashing Without DTC
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag-
nostic test mode. How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are N
described later. Refer to "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE".
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
O
• System readiness test (SRT) codes P
• Test values
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has
a malfunction.
• Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
PBIB0092E
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor)

1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
Refer to "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)".
2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II
(Self-diagnostic Results)".
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-20
or see EC-505.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-

tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code. A
EC
F
PBIA3905E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
G
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later H
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal- I
function. (See EC-148.)
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to "How J
to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)".
• If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
• Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
K
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR
In this mode, the MIL displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated
oxygen sensor 1. L
MIL Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
Closed loop system M
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop. N
To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until
engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load conditions. Then make sure that the O
MIL comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no load.
OBD System Operation Chart INFOID:0000000006029383
P
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
• When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-174, "Two Trip Detection
Logic".

• The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs
while counting, the counter will reset.
• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) with-
out the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injec-
tion System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern
C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CON-
SULT-III will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other

MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see "RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP
DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”".
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see "RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS
FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”".
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

EC
L
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is de- M
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
N
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM. O
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de- *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when ve-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip hicle is driven once (pattern C) with- P
freeze frame data will be cleared. out the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-

TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
• The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to
70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
• The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
• The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is
stored in ECM.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

EC
L
SEF393SD
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is de- M
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
stored in ECM.
N
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi-
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the cle is driven once (pattern B) without
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM. O
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip P
freeze frame data will be cleared.
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETE-
RIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

<Driving Pattern A>
JMBIA1920GB
• The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
• The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
• The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).

A
Basic Inspection INFOID:0000000006029384
1.INSPECTION START EC
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following: C
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
D
- Air cleaner clogging
- Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E
- Air conditioner switch is OFF.
- Rear window defogger switch is OFF. F
SEF983U
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. G
I
SEF976U
J
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or GST.
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
L
M
SEF977U
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. N
>> GO TO 3
O
3.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. P

load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
PBIA8513J
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-197, "Idle Speed and Ignition
Timing Check".

Without CONSULT-III
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
Refer to EC-197, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-199, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
>> GO TO 5.
Perform EC-199, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
>> GO TO 6.
Refer to EC-199, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
2. GO TO 4.
7.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-III
Timing Check".

A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) A

Without CONSULT-III EC
Refer to EC-197, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check". C

M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8. E
Check the Following. F
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit.
Refer to EC-358.
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit.
Refer to EC-352. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace. H
2. GO TO 4.
I
Re-communicating Function". J
>> GO TO 4.
K
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. L
M
A/T: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
OK or NG N
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB3263E O
1. Stop engine.
P
>> GO TO 12.
Perform EC-199, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".

>> GO TO 13.
Refer to EC-199, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
2. GO TO 4.
With CONSULT-III
Timing Check".

Without CONSULT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 16.
PBIB3263E
16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-187.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit.
Refer to EC-358.
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit.
Refer to EC-352.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. A
2. GO TO 4.
18.CHECK ECM FUNCTION EC
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-211, "ECM C
>> GO TO 4. D
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check INFOID:0000000006029385
E
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. F
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
G
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A H
1. Attach timing light to loop wire (1) as shown.
• : Vehicle front
I
K
PBIB3320E
L
2. Check ignition timing.
• Timing indicator (1)
O
PBIB3263E
Method B
P
1. Remove No. 4 ignition coil (1).

• : Vehicle front
PBIB3321E
2. Connect No. 4 ignition coil (1) and No. 4 spark plug with suitable high-tension wire (A) as shown, and
attach timing light clamp (B) to this wire.
• : Vehicle front
PBIB3322E
PBIB3334E

• Timing indicator (1)
PBIB3263E
Procedure After Replacing ECM INFOID:0000000006029386
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.

3. Perform EC-199, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
4. Perform EC-199, "Idle Air Volume Learning".

Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning INFOID:0000000006029387
A
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time EC
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
C
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. D
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning INFOID:0000000006029388
E
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by F
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE G
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. H
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning INFOID:0000000006029389 I
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific J
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. K
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. L
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
• Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
• PNP switch (M/T): ON
M
• Selector lever (A/T): P or N
• Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) N
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
- A/T models
O
• With CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi-
cates less than 0.9 V.
• Without CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
- M/T models P
• Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III

4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Vol-
ume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to
the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
Item Specification
Idle speed
Ignition timing
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
a malfunction.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
Item Specification
Idle speed
Ignition timing

13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- A
DURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: EC
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
C
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-507. D
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
• Engine stalls. E
• Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check INFOID:0000000006029390
F
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-III G
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
H
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel pump fuse (1) located in IPDM E/R (2).
• : Vehicle front J
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
K
pressure.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. L
PBIB2958E
M
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
N
• Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
• The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
• Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick O
connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside.
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, rear defogger, A/C,
etc.) Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes in P
manifold vacuum.
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres-
sure cannot be completely released because C11 models do not have fuel return system.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".

2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check B and fuel tube
adapter (KV10118400) D, then connect fuel pressure gauge A.
• : To quick connector
• : To fuel tube (engine side)
• C: Clamp
• Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine
NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).
• To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moder-
ately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
• Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with dam-
age or cracks on it. PBIB2982E
• Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-165.
• Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
4. Connect fuel hose for fuel pressure check (1) to fuel tube
(engine side) with clamp (2) as shown in the figure.
• No.2 spool (5)
• Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moist-
ened with gasoline.
• Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube
(3) and No.1 spool (4).
• Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the
No.1 spool on fuel tube.
• Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710
or 16439 40U00).
PBIB2983E
• When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
• Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
• Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in).
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13 in-lb)

• Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
5. Connect fuel tube adapter to quick connector.
• A: Fuel pressure gauge
• B: Fuel hose for fuel pressure check
6. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose
with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel
tube does not come off.
7. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage.
8. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
9. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. BBIA0695E
Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.
• During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

10. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
• Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
• Fuel filter for clogging
• Fuel pump
• Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction INFOID:0000000006029391
INTRODUCTION EC
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen- C
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
D
E
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit- F

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace- G
ment of good parts.
SEF233G
I
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should J
be performed. Follow the Work Flow on "WORK FLOW".
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a drivability complaint. The customer K
can supply good information about such incidents, especially inter-
mittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what
conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example on
"Worksheet Sample" should be used. L
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot drivability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle. M
WORK FLOW

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Overall Sequence
PBIB3456E
Detailed Flow
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET".
>> GO TO 2.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2.CHECK DTC*1 A
1. Check DTC*1.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed.
- Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2. (Print them out with CONSULT-III or GST.) EC
1
- Erase DTC* . (Refer to EC-175, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".)
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-209, "Symptom Matrix Chart".) C
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
D
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5. E
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. F
>> GO TO 5. G
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. H
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
I
>> GO TO 6.
J
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1, and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected
again.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-207, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order. K
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
• Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This L
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirmation
Procedure. M
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.
N
No >> Check according to EC-245.
Perform EC-193, "Basic Inspection". O
With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7.
Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 9. P
7.PERFORM SPEC IN DATA MONITOR MODE
With CONSULT-III
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value using
CONSULT-III “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. Refer to EC-237, "Inspection Procedure".
Are they within the SP value?
Yes >> GO TO 9.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
No >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-238, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-209, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom
in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-
16.
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-III. Refer to EC-222, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value", EC-234, "CONSULT-III Refer-
ence Value in Data Monitor".
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-175, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
>> GO TO 12.
12.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
OK or NG
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-175, "Emission-related Diagnostic
Information" and AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to
EC-175, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou- A
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
EC
tomer complaint.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and C
DTC to be detected. Examples:
• Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
D
Worksheet Sample
MTBL0017
P
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000006029392
chart.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

• P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
• P0112 P0113 Intake air temperature sensor
• P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
• P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
• P0605 ECM
• P0705 Transmission range switch
• P1229 Sensor power supply
• P1610 - P1615 NATS
• P1706 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
2 • P0132 P0133 P0134 P1143 P1144 Heated oxygen sensor 1
• P0135 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
• P0138 P0139 P1146 P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2
• P0141 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
• P0444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
• P0710 P0720 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0740 P0744 P0745 P0750 P0755 P1760 A/T related sensors, solenoid
valves and switches
• P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• P1128 Throttle control motor
• P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function
• P0300 - P0304 Misfire
• P0420 Three way catalyst function
• P1715 Input speed sensor
Fail-Safe Chart INFOID:0000000006029393
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

P0103
P0117 Engine coolant temperature Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condi-
P0118 sensor circuit tion.CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-
Condition
III display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON
40°C (104°F)
or START
Approx. 4 minutes or more after
80°C (176°F)
engine starting
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cool-
ing fan operates while engine is running.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P0123 in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0223 condition. EC
P1121 Electric throttle control actu- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return
ator spring malfunction:)
C
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to D
20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, E
the engine stalls.
P1122 Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
F
tion fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124 Throttle control relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1126 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. G
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a H
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P2123 sensor in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. I
P2128 condition.
J
• When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there
is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by K
means of operating fail-safe function.
driver to repair the malfunction. L
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
M
Symptom Matrix Chart INFOID:0000000006029394

N

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-486
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-201
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-481
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-167
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-172
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-193
EC-383,
EC-385
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-193
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-491
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-246
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2 EC-259
1
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3 EC-270
EC-280,
3 EC-287,
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit EC-296,
1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-400,
EC-405
EC-275,
EC-337,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-436,
EC-438,
2 2 EC-467
EC-440,
EC-455,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-460,
EC-472
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-348
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-352
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-358
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-374
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-376
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-378
cuit
PNP signal circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-445

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A

EC



Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-500 F
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-479
ATC-26
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 G
MTC-25
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4 BRC-9
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. H
(continued on next page)

I
SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH J



K
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page L
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
N
Fuel Fuel tank FL-10
5 O
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-182
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit — P
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
Low octane)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
Warranty symptom code AA ENGINE STALL
AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Air Air duct EM-162
Air cleaner EM-162
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-162
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-165
Air leakage from intake manifold/
EM-165
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery SC-4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit SC-23
Starter circuit 3 SC-8
1
Signal plate 6 EM-230
AT-92, EC-
PNP signal 4
445
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-213
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-230
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain EM-187
mecha-
Camshaft EM-197
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-187
Intake valve
3 EM-213
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket EM-169,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
EX-4
Three way catalyst

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A

EC



Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

Lubrica- EM-172, F
tion Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil LU-22, LU-
filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 17, LU-20,
LU-16 G
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-17
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-27
Thermostat 5 CO-34 H
Water control valve CO-37
Water pump CO-32
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 I
Water gallery CO-21
Cooling fan CO-31
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminat- 5 J
CO-23
ed coolant
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) 1 1 BL-210
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. K

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000006029395
PBIB3261E
1. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor
and spark plug valve
7. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 8. IPDM E/R 9. ECM
(with intake air temperature sensor) (with throttle position sensor, throttle
control motor)
solenoid valve

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
L
BBIA0724E
: Vehicle front M
(with intake air temperature sensor) (with built in throttle position sensor,
throttle control motor) N
4. PCV valve 5. Cooling fan motor 6. Resistor
7. Refrigerant pressure sensor
O

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
BBIA0735E
: Vehicle front
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Knock sensor 3. IPDM E/R
valve
4. Fuel pump fuse 5. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 6. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
harness connector (view with in-
spection hole cover removed)
7. Fuel pressure regulator 8. Fuel level sensor 9. Fuel tank temperature sensor
10. Ignition coil 11. Fuel injector

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
L
BBIA0733E
: Vehicle front M
1. HO2S1 2. Three way catalyst (Manifold) 3. HO2S2
4. Three way catalyst (Under floor) 5. Muffler 6. HO2S1 harness connector
7. HO2S2 harness connector N

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIA9902J
: Vehicle front
1. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 2. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 3. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
4. ECM 5. Stop lamp switch 6. Accelerator pedal position sensor

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Vacuum Hose Drawing INFOID:0000000006029396
EC
PBIB3345E
L
: From EVAP canister
1. EVAP canister purge volume control 2. Intake manifold 3. EVAP purge resonator
solenoid valve M
NOTE:
Refer to EC-160, "Schematic" for Vacuum Control System. N

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000006029397
ABBWA0372GB

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
AABWA0139GB

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000006029398
PBIA9221J
ECM Terminal and Reference Value INFOID:0000000006029399
PREPARATION
1. ECM (1) is located in the engine room left side near battery.
• : Vehicle front
PBIB2959E

• When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen (A) it
with levers (1) as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
- ECM (2)
- Fasten (B)
3. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
• Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
• Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
PBIB2947E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

CAUTION:
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
Approximately 3.2 V

1 L
PBIA8150J
Throttle control motor power BATTERY VOLTAGE

supply (11 - 14 V)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color A
Approximately 10 V
EC
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 1 C
3 G
heater
PBIA8148J

D
[Engine is running] (11 - 14 V)
E
Approximately 1.8 V

• Engine stopped F
4 P Throttle control motor (Close)
PBIA8149J
G
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the H
following conditions are met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for I
5 G
heater 1 minute under no load.
PBIA8148J
[Ignition switch: ON] J

K
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
L
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
M
EVAP canister purge volume
9 P PBIB0050E
control solenoid valve
Approximately 10 V N
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More
O
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
P
ECM ground Body ground
11 B • Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
15 Y Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14 V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0 V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
0 - 0.3 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
21 G Ignition signal No. 4

0.2 - 0.5 V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm.
PBIA9266J

• For 1 second after turning ignition switch
0 - 1.0 V
ON
23 GR Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
switch ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.

(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
PBIA4943J
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turning ig-
(11 - 14 V)
nition switch OFF
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color A
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) EC
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V C
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground D
36 Y • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
37 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5 V
• Idle speed E
Approximately 0 - 4.8 V
38 P [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
sensor
F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
40 — • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(Knock sensor)
• Idle speed
G
[Engine is running]
41 GR Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0 V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch:
ON (Compressor operates.) H
44 B (Engine coolant temperature • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
sensor) • Idle speed
I
Approximately 0.4 V
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running] J
• Warm-up condition 0.8 - 1.1 V
[Engine is running] 0.8 - 1.1 to Approximately 2.4 V
• Warm-up condition (Check for linear voltage rise in re-
K
• Engine is revving from idle to about 4,000 sponse to engine being increased
rpm to about 4,000 rpm.)
Approximately 0 - 4.8 V L
46 V [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sensor
air temperature.
Sensor ground [Engine is running] M
48 BR (Refrigerant pressure sen- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
sor) • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
0 - Approximately 1.0 V N
49 SB Heated oxygen sensor 1 • Warm-up condition
(Periodically change)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm O
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
50 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 0 - Approximately 1.0 V
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 P
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for
1 minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
52 LG • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
• Idle speed

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
55 O (Intake air temperature sen- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
sor) • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
56 P • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
59 O • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
• Idle speed
Approximately 4.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
Crankshaft position sensor PBIB2998E

61 W
(POS)
Approximately 4.0 V
[Engine is running]
PBIB2999E

62 R [Crankshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
63 BR [Camshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
1.0 - 2.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.

65 G
(PHASE)
1.0 - 2.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm.
PBIB2987E
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE

Park/neutral position (PNP) • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) (11 - 14 V)
69 L
signal [Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 0 V
• Shift lever: Except above
Sensor power supply
72 V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color A
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed EC
7 - 10 V
Intake valve timing control
73 P [Engine is running] C
solenoid valve
• When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly
D
PBIA4937J
Sensor power supply

74 W (Refrigerant pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V E
sensor)
Sensor power supply
75 BR [Crankshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V F
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
78 O [Camshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
G
(PHASE)]
83 P CAN communication line — —
84 L CAN communication line — — H
88 LG DATA link connector Approximately 10.5 V
• CONSULT-III or GST: Disconnected.
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V I
(11 - 14 V)
[Ignition switch: OFF] J
Approximately 0 V
99 R Stop lamp switch
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14 V) K
Sensor power supply
102 SB (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
sensor 2)
L
• Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6 V
103 GR
sensor 2 M
Sensor ground [Engine is running] N
104 Y (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V

BATTERY VOLTAGE O
(11 - 14 V)
Sensor power supply
106 P (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V P
sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
110 G
111 R (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) INFOID:0000000006029400
FUNCTION

Work support
Self Diagnostic Result
Data Monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Active Test
Function Test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
DTC & SRT Confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECU Identification ECM part number can be read.
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item
Work item Condition Usage

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE • Fuel pump will stop by touching “START” during idling. When releasing fuel pressure from
Crank a few times after engine stalls. fuel line
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN • The idle air volume that keeps the engine within the spec- When learning the idle air volume
ified range is memorized in ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT • The coefficient of self-learning control mixture ratio returns When clearing the coefficient of
to the original coefficient. self-learning control value
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • Idle condition When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • Idle condition When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-175, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
Freeze frame data
Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE EC
• The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to
CODE
EC-148.)
[PXXXX]
C
• One mode in the following is displayed.
FUEL SYS-B1
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control D
CAL/LD VALUE [%] • The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
E
[°C] or [°F]
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than
F
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel sched-
ule. G
VEHICL SPEED
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. H
[km/h] or [mph]
ABSOL TH-P/S [%] • The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL I
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
J
DATA MONITOR MODE

K
Monitored Item
Monitored item [Unit] Description Remarks

L
• Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the signals of
ENG SPEED drops below the idle rpm.
the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft posi-
[rpm] • If the signal is interrupted while the engine is
tion sensor (PHASE).
running, an abnormal value may be indicated. M
• When the engine is stopped, a certain value is
MAS A/F SE-B1 indicated.
• The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is displayed.
[V] • When engine is running, specification range is
N
indicated in "SPEC".
• “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width
B/FUEL SCHDL • When engine is running, specification range is
programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
[ms] indicated in "SPEC". O
rection.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain value is
indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 • The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction • This data also includes the data for the air-fuel P
[%] factor per cycle is indicated. ratio learning control.
• When engine is running, specification range is
indicated in "SPEC".
• When the engine coolant temperature sensor
• The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal
COOLAN TEMP/S is open or short-circuited, ECM enters fail-
voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor) is dis-
[°C] or [°F] safe mode. The engine coolant temperature
played.
determined by the ECM is displayed.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
HO2S1 (B1) • The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 1 is dis-
[V] played.
HO2S2 (B1) • The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is dis-
[V] played.
• Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal during air-fuel ra- • After turning ON the ignition switch, “RICH” is
tio feedback control: displayed until air-fuel mixture ratio feedback
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) RICH: means the mixture became “rich”, and control is be- control begins.
[RICH/LEAN] ing affected toward a leaner mixture. • When the air-fuel ratio feedback is clamped,
LEAN: means the mixture became “lean”, and control is be- the value just before the clamping is displayed
ing affected toward a rich mixture. continuously.
• Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three way cata-
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) • When the engine is stopped, a certain value is
lyst is relatively small.
[RICH/LEAN] indicated.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three way cata-
lyst is relatively large.
VHCL SPEED SE • The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal
[km/h] or [mph] is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT
• The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
[V]
ACCEL SEN 1
[V] • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by ECM in-
• The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is dis-
ternally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal
ACCEL SEN 2 played.
voltage signal.
[V]
TP SEN 1-B1
[V] • THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by ECM in-
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ternally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal
TP SEN 2-B1 voltage signal.
[V]
INT/A TEMP SE • The intake air temperature (determined by the signal volt-
[°C] or [°F] age of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicated.
• Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed by the
START SIGNAL • After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed
ECM according to the signals of engine speed and battery
[ON/OFF] regardless of the starter signal.
voltage.
CLSD THL POS • Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by the ECM ac-
[ON/OFF] cording to the accelerator pedal position sensor signal.
AIR COND SIG • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner switch
[ON/OFF] as determined by the air conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neutral position
[ON/OFF] (PNP) signal.
PW/ST SIGNAL • [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system (deter-
[ON/OFF] mined by the signal sent from EPS control unit) is indicated.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load sig-
nal.
LOAD SIGNAL ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting
[ON/OFF] switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and lighting switch
are OFF.
IGNITION SW
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch.
[ON/OFF]
HEATER FAN SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan switch
[ON/OFF] signal.
BRAKE SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp switch
[ON/OFF] signal.
INJ PULSE-B1 • Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compensated • When the engine is stopped, a certain com-
[msec] by ECM according to the input signals. puted value is indicated.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
IGN TIMING • Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to • When the engine is stopped, a certain value is
[BTDC] the input signals. indicated.
CAL/LD VALUE • “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the current
[%] airflow divided by peak airflow. EC
MASS AIRFLOW • Indicates the mass airflow computed by ECM according to
[g·m/s] the signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor.
• Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid C
PURG VOL C/V valve control value computed by the ECM according to the
[%] input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value increases. D
INT/V TIM (B1)
• Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle.
[°CA]
• The control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid E
INT/V SOL (B1) valve (determined by ECM according to the input signal) is
[%] indicated.
• The advance angle becomes larger as the value increases
AIR COND RLY • The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by
F
[ON/OFF] ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.
FUEL PUMP RLY • Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined
[ON/OFF] by ECM according to the input signals. G
THRTL RELAY • Indicates the throttle control motor relay control condition
[ON/OFF] determined by the ECM according to the input signals.
• Indicates the condition of the cooling fan (determined by H
ECM according to the input signals).
COOLING FAN
HI: High speed operation
[HI/LOW/OFF]
I
OFF: Stop
HO2S1 HTR (B1) • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 1
[ON/OFF] heater determined by ECM according to the input signals.
J
HO2S2 HTR (B1) • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2
[ON/OFF] heater determined by ECM according to the input signals.
I/P_PULLY_SPD • Indicates the engine speed computed from the input speed
[rpm] sensor signal. K
VEHICLE SPEED • The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal
[km/h] or [MPH] sent from TCM is displayed.
L
• Display the condition of idle air volume learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been performed yet.
[YET/CMPLT] CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already been per-
formed successfully. M
TRVL AFTER MIL
• Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
[km] or [mile]
O2SEN HTR DTY • Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control value N
[%] computed by the ECM according to the input signals.
AC PRESS SEN • The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is
[V] displayed.
O
• Indicates DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (slow response) con-
HO2 S2 DIAG2 (B1)* dition.
[INCMP/CMPLT] INCMP: Self-diagnosis is incomplete.
CMPLT: Self-diagnosis is complete. P
*: The item is indicated, but not used.
NOTE:
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Test item Condition Judgment Check item (Remedy)

FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Fuel injector
TION • Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Timing light: Set • Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING CHECK ITEM.
• Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-III.
engine.
• Compression
• A/C switch OFF
POWER BAL- • Fuel injector
• Selector lever: P or N (A/T), Neu- Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE • Power transistor
tral (M/T)
• Spark plug
• Cut off each fuel injector signal
• Ignition coil
one at a time using CONSULT-III.
COOLING FAN* • Turn the cooling fan “LOW”, “HI” Cooling fan moves and stops. • Cooling fan relay
and “OFF” with CONSULT-III. • Cooling fan motor
• Engine: Return to the original • Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see • Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP • Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-III. • Fuel injector
stopped)
FUEL PUMP RE- Fuel pump relay makes the operat- • Harness and connectors
• Turn the fuel pump relay ON and
LAY ing sound. • Fuel pump relay
OFF using CONSULT-III and lis-
ten to operating sound.
• Engine: After warming up, run en-
gine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL • Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to • Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. • Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-III.
V/T ASSIGN AN- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Intake valve timing control sole-
GLE • Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM.
noid valve
CONSULT-III.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-175, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode Test item Condition Reference page

HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-287
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 EC-296
HO2S1
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 EC-400
Refer to corresponding
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 EC-405
trouble diagnosis for DTC.
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-312
HO2S2 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-410
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-418

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function INFOID:0000000006029401
A
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978/ISO
15031-4 has 8 different functions explained below. EC
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name GST or Generic Scan Tool is used in this service manual.
C
SEF139P
E
FUNCTION
Diagnostic service Function

F
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including an-
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
alog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
G
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-175, "Emission-related Diagnostic
Information".
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs H
were stored by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This in-
cludes:
• Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01) I
• Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
• Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
• Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
• Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01) J
• Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. K
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
L
Service $08 — This diagnostic service is not applicable on this vehicle.
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs. M
Service $0A* PERMANENT DTCs This diagnostic service gains access to permanent DTCs which were stored by ECM.
*: Service $0A* is not applied for regions where it is not mandated.

N
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
2. Connect GST to data link connector (1), which is located under O
LH dash panel.
BBIA0734E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S
5. Perform each diagnostic service according to each service pro-

cedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
SEF416S
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor INFOID:0000000006029402
Remarks:
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the
ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals
input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
Monitor Item Condition Specification
• Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED
tion. tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-237.
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-237.
A/F ALPHA-B1 See EC-237.
0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0
HO2S1 (B1) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm
V
are met.
0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0
V
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) - Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication.
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14 V
EC
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9 V
ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8 V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9 V C

ACCEL SEN 2*
TP SEN 1-B1 Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V
(Engine stopped) D
TP SEN 2-B1*
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
E
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
CLSD THL POS • Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF F
engine ON
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON G
Shift lever: Except above OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine
H
Steering wheel: Being turned ON
Rear window defogger switch: ON
ON
and/or Lighting switch: 2nd
LOAD SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON I
Rear window defogger switch and light-
OFF
ing switch: OFF
J
Heater fan: Operating. ON
Heater fan: Not operating OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF K
• Air conditioner switch: OFF L
INJ PULSE-B1 • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T) 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• No load
M
• Engine: After warming up Idle 8° - 18° BTDC
IGN TIMING • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T) 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC N
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 10% - 35%
• Air conditioner switch: OFF O
CAL/LD VALUE • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T) 2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
• No load
P
• Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T) 2,500 rpm 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
• No load

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PURG VOL C/V • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T) 2,000 rpm 0 - 50%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1) • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
(M/T) Approx. 0° - 40°CA
quickly
• No load
INT/V SOL (B1) • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
(M/T) Approx. 0% - 90%
quickly
• No load
engine ON
ON
OFF
(207°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN engine LOW
98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)
HIGH
(212°F) or more
ON
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
tachometer indication
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VEHICLE SPEED
indication. speedometer indication
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL • Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
• Engine speed: Below 3,400 rpm
• Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0 V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
NOTE:
HO2 S2 DIAG2 (B1)
The item is indicated, but not used.
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.

A
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONI- EC
one or more malfunctions. C
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: D
tion)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) E
Testing Condition INFOID:0000000006029404
F
• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
• Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F) G
- A/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID H
• Electrical load: Not applied
- Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight I
ahead.
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000006029405
J
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-193, "Basic Inspection". K
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode
L
with CONSULT-III.
5. If NG, go to EC-238, "Diagnosis Procedure". M

OVERALL SEQUENCE
PBIB2384E

EC
PBIB3213E
DETAILED PROCEDURE P
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-237, "Testing Condition".
the SP value.
NOTE:

Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
1. Stop the engine.
3. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6.
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
dition.
>> INSPECTION END

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-201, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-201, "Fuel Pressure Check".
GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
- Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
- Clogged fuel filter
- Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-486.)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-201, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.

>> GO TO 8. A
1. Start engine. EC
the SP value.
OK or NG
C
NG >> GO TO 9.
9.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST D
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F

- Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-491.)
- Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-481.) G
- Intake air leakage
- Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-213, "On-Vehicle Service".)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. H
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11. I
1. Start engine. J
the SP value.
OK or NG
K
NG >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 FUNCTION L
2. Select “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), M
check that the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time : RICH → LEAN → RICH

N
2 times : RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. O
NG >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
P
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 and its circuit. Refer to EC-296.
>> GO TO 14.
1. Start engine.

the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15.
1. Stop the engine.
>> GO TO 16.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
SP value.
OK or NG
- Belt tension of alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
- Noise from engine
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the
OK or NG
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR A

1. Stop the engine.
EC
>> GO TO 22.
22.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” C
1. Start engine.
the SP value. D
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-259.
2. GO TO 29. E
NG >> GO TO 23.
F
SP value.
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29.
24.REPLACE ECM H
1. Replace ECM.
Re-communicating Function". I
J
>> GO TO 29.
25.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM K
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 27.
26.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” N
SP value.
OK or NG O
27.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” P
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30.


valve
>> GO TO 30.
OK or NG
OK or NG

A
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function EC
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may C
STEP in Work Flow Situation D
2 The CONSULT-III is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
E
F
1.INSPECTION START
G
>> GO TO 2. H
Refer to EC-251, "Ground Inspection". I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
J
Perform GI-16, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident", “INCIDENT SIMULATION K
TESTS”.
OK or NG

AABWA0140GB
CAUTION:
Termi- A
Wire Color Item Condition Data (DC Voltage)
nal No.
ECM ground Body ground
11 B • Idle speed
EC
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
• For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
32 P
ECM relay OFF C
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition
(11 - 14 V)
switch OFF D
(11 - 14 V) E
Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
105 G [Ignition switch: ON]
ECM (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running] F
• Idle speed

G
1.INSPECTION START
Start engine. H
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8. I
No >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
J
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
SULT-III or tester.
K
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
M
PBIA9561J
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART N

• Harness connectors M69, E7
• 10 A fuse O
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body.
Refer to EC-251, "Ground Inspection".

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.

OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-491.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB2658E

2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.

CONSULT-III or tester. A
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery

voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop EC
approximately 0 V.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. C
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO PBIB3037E
11. D
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground with CON- E
SULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage F

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11. G
PBIA9562J
H
J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E43. M
N
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
12.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART P


13.CHECK 20 A FUSE
1. Disconnect 20 A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20 A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
15.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16.

Refer to EC-245.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".

A
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. EC
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: C
• Clean as required to assure good contact. D
• Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eye- E
let make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-29, "Ground Distribution".
F
PBIB1870E
K

Trouble diagnosis
name
• When ECM is not transmitting or receiving
U1000*1
CAN communication signal of OBD (emission-
1000*1 related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. • Harness or connectors
CAN communication
• When ECM is not transmitting or receiving (CAN communication line is open or
line
U1001*2 CAN communication signal other than OBD shorted.)
1001*2 (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or
more.
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. (A/T)
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. (M/T)
*2: The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-253, "Diagnosis Procedure".

EC
BBWA2672E
P
Go to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic (A/T).

The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis (M/T).
U1010 When detecting error during the initial diagno-
CAN communication bus • ECM
1010 sis for CAN controller of ECM.

1.INSPECTION START
1. Erase DTC.
2. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-254, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
3. Is the 1st trip DTC U1010 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) C
Engine speed and piston position
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Intake valve Intake valve timing control
timing control solenoid valve
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) D
Vehicle speed*
Combination meter
E
J
PBIB3333E
valve. K
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to L
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
M
Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item Condition Specification

N
INT/V TIM (B1) • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
(M/T) Approx. 0° - 40°CA O
quickly
• No load
• Air conditioner switch: OFF P
(M/T) Approx. 0% - 90%
quickly
• No load

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name Detecting condition Possible cause

• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P0011 Intake valve timing control There is a gap between angle of target and • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
0011 performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
• Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for in-
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters in fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected.

Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function
CAUTION:
NOTE:
• If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111. See EC-
378.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10 V and 16 V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-III

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 60 °C (140°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 3.87 msec
A/T: P or N position
Shift lever
M/T: Neutral position
4. Let engine idle for 10 seconds.

COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Driving location (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. A
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP EC
1. Start engine.
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi- C
nated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
NG >> Go to LU-17, "Inspection".
PBIA8559J
F
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
H
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) L
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft (1) rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft N
rear end or replace camshaft.
O
PBIA9557J
6.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION P

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
Yes or No
Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-187, "Removal and Installation".
No >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-197, "Removal and Installation".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean lubrication line.
Refer to EC-245.
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-353, "Wiring Diagram" for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-359, "Wiring Diagram"
for CMP sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIA9591J
4. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
PBIA9558J


A
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It EC
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater C
the heat loss.
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The D
PBIA9559J E
Specification data are reference values. F

MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-237. G
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
CAL/LD VALUE (M/T) H
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral I
MASS AIRFLOW (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
• No load
J
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. K
Trouble diagnosis
name
L
P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 circuit low input to ECM. • Intake air leaks
• Mass air flow sensor M
P0103 Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
0103 circuit high input sent to ECM.
• Mass air flow sensor N
FAIL-SAFE MODE
O
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P
NOTE:
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-262, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2. Check DTC.
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Check DTC.

EC
BBWA2678E
P
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turning igni-
(11 - 14 V)
tion switch OFF
Approximately 0.4 V
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running] 0.8 - 1.1 to Approximately 2.4 V
• Warm-up condition (Check for linear voltage rise in
• Engine is revving from idle to about 4,000 response to engine being in-
rpm creased to about 4,000 rpm.)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
52 LG • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
• Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
1.INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.
BBIA0698E

: Vehicle front A
4. Body ground E15
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor (1) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. D
BBIA0701E
G
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. I
NG >> GO TO 5.
J
PBIB1168E
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K

• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
L
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
6.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. N
3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 52.
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 45.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT-III
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
0.8 - 1.1
operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.8 - 1.1 to Approx. 2.4*
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
• Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
8. Perform step 2 to 4 again.
9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-III

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 45 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground. A
Condition Voltage (V)

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 EC
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
0.8 - 1.1
operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.8 - 1.1 to Approx. 2.4*
C
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm. PBIA9564J
D
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element E
• Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 and 3 again. F
6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. G
7. Perform step 2 and 3 again.
8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
H
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR I


DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>

Voltage* Resistance (kΩ)
[°C (°F)]
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 46 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.

Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Trouble diagnosis
name
Intake air tempera-
ture sensor circuit
low input
Intake air tempera- • Intake air temperature sensor
ture sensor circuit
0113 sent to ECM.
high input
NOTE:

EC
BBWA2679E
P


BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor) (1) harness connector.
BBIA0701E
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and

ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB1169E
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 55.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EC
Refer to EC-245.
C
>> INSPECTION END
D
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5
E
and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ)

F
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor). G
PBIA9559J
H
K
SEF012P

L
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Refer to EM-162, "Removal and Installation". M

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
SEF594K
<Reference data>

Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)
[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 38 (Engine
SEF012P
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
Name
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor cir-
cuit low input
perature sensor cir-
0118 sent to ECM.
cuit high input
FAIL-SAFE MODE

Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode A

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided EC
Condition
(CONSULT-III display)
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting 80°C (176°F) C
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while D
engine is running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000006029445 E
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. F
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-272, "Diagnosis Procedure". G

BBWA2680E


EC
BBIA0698E
D
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15 E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. F
2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (1) har- G
ness connector.
- : Vehicle front
PBIB3324E J
3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with

CONSULT-III or tester. K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 3.
in harness or connectors. M
PBIB0080E
3.CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT N

O
3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 44.
Continuity should exist. P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
Temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ)

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR


A

a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position C
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM D
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
tion.
PBIB0145E E
F

G
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V
TP SEN 1-B1
(Engine stopped)
TP SEN 2-B1* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. H
I
NOTE:
Refer to EC-440. J
P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
K
0122 2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
0123 2 circuit high input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2) L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. M

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 N
degrees.
O
NOTE: P
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V at idle.
2. Check DTC.

ALBWA0140GB
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire A
nal No. Color
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V EC
• Engine stopped C
Less than 4.75 V
[Ignition switch: ON] D
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
34 O Throttle position sensor 2 E
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed
G
Sensor power supply

H

I
J
BBIA0698E M
: Vehicle front
1. Body ground E24 2. Engine ground F9 3. Engine ground F16 N
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT P

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator (1) harness connec-
tor.
- : Vehicle front
PBIB3325E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

2 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3646E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 36.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 34 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.

>> INSPECTION END
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A
Refer to EC-245.
EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
D
4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T). E
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 33 (TP sensor 1 signal),
34 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
F
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
33 Fully released More than 0.36 V G

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
34 Fully released Less than 4.75 V

(Throttle position sensor 2) H
Fully depressed More than 0.36 V
PBIB3038E
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
I
J
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-165, "Removal and Installation". K

DTC P0132 HO2S1
DTC P0132 HO2S1

approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio.
The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 V to 0
V.
SEF463R
SEF288D

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0 V
• Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm. LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.
PBIB2266E

DTC P0132 HO2S1
A
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC
3. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. C
D

DTC P0132 HO2S1
ABBWA0373GB
CAUTION:

DTC P0132 HO2S1
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. A
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
EC
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running] C
3 G
heater D
PBIA8148J

• Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE E
[Engine is running]
0 - Approximately 1.0 V F
56 P Approximately 0 V G
(Heated oxygen sensor 1) • Idle speed
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006029463 H

J
BBIA0698E M
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. O
2.RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 P

DTC P0132 HO2S1
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1 (1).
• : Vehicle front
• Exhaust manifold (2)
Tightening torque: 50 N·m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB2966E
3.CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector (1).
- : Vehicle front
3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 1 and ECM
terminal 56.

OK or NG PBIB3305E
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 49.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 or HO2S1 terminal 4 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 connector for water.
Water should not exist.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
6.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.
Refer to EC-245.

DTC P0132 HO2S1
>> INSPECTION END A
EC
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. C
2. Set “POST_TRIGGER” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
D
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-III screen.
6. Check the following. E
• “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown in the figure. F
• “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6 V at least once.
• “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3 V at least once.
• “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0 V. G
SEF217YA H
K
PBIB3648E
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. L
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-III M
N
stant under no load.
• The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3 V and 0.6 to 1.0 V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds. O
• The maximum voltage is over 0.6 V at least 1 time.
• The minimum voltage is below 0.3 V at least 1 time.
• The voltage never exceeds 1.0 V. P
1 time: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V
2 times: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V
→ 0 - 0.3 V
CAUTION: PBIA9566J
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.

DTC P0132 HO2S1


DTC P0133 HO2S1
DTC P0133 HO2S1
A
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It EC

approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. C
The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 V to 0 D
V.
SEF463R E
SEF288D
I
Specification data are reference values. J

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0 V
K
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) rpm. Changes more than 5 times dur-
ing 10 seconds.
L
To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1, this diagnosis M

measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal. The time
is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback
control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 temperature index.
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (heated oxy- N
gen sensor 1 cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
PBIB2991E
P

DTC P0133 HO2S1
• Fuel pressure
P0133 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The response of the voltage signal from the
• Fuel injector
0133 circuit slow response sensor takes more than the specified time.
• Intake air leaks
• Exhaust gas leaks
• PCV valve
• Mass air flow sensor
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
• Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0133” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III.
4. Touch “START”.
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,400 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded,
return to step 5.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 40 to
50 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,400 rpm

VHCL SPEED SE More than 80 km/h (50 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 3.0 - 12.0 msec
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
291, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST

DTC P0133 HO2S1
stant under no load. A
• The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3 V and 0.6 to 1.0 V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
EC
1 time: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V
2 times: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0
V → 0 - 0.3 V C
4. If NG, go to EC-291, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PBIA9566J

DTC P0133 HO2S1
ABBWA0373GB
CAUTION:

DTC P0133 HO2S1
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
EC
Approximately 10 V
3 G
heater D
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]

J
BBIA0698E M
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. O
2.RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 P

DTC P0133 HO2S1
• : Vehicle front
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB2966E
3.CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
SEC502D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector, and
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Make sure that DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-175, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information".
BBIA0701E
Yes or No
DTC P0133 HO2S1
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or DTC P0172. Refer to EC-325 or EC-331.
No >> GO TO 6. A
EC
- : Vehicle front
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 1 and ECM C
terminal 56. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. D

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. E
PBIB3305E
7.CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F
G
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 or HO2S1 terminal 4 and ground. H

I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. L
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
9.CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-172, "Component Inspection". M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace PCV valve. N
Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection". O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. P
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0133 HO2S1

With CONSULT-III
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown in the figure.
• “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0 V.
SEF217YA
PBIB3648E
CAUTION:
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
Without CONSULT-III
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
• The voltage never exceeds 1.0 V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V
2 times: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V
→ 0 - 0.3 V
CAUTION: PBIA9566J
one.

DTC P0133 HO2S1
A
EC

DTC P0134 HO2S1
DTC P0134 HO2S1

V.
SEF463R
SEF288D

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0 V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) rpm. Changes more than 5 times dur-
ing 10 seconds.

not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately 0.3
V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is within
200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks that
this time is not inordinately long.
SEF237U
P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The voltage from the sensor is constantly ap-
0134 circuit no activity detected prox. 0.3 V.

DTC P0134 HO2S1
A
CAUTION:
NOTE: EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle. C
WITH CONSULT-III
D
2. Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0134” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE: E
return to step 4.
F
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 to
60 seconds.)
G
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.3 - 13.0 msec H
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC- I
J
K
WITH GST
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 49 (HO2S1 signal) and ground. L
• The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 to 0.4 V. M
O
PBIA9566J

DTC P0134 HO2S1
ABBWA0373GB
CAUTION:

DTC P0134 HO2S1
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
EC
Approximately 10 V
3 G
heater D
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]

J
BBIA0698E M
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. O
2.CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT P

DTC P0134 HO2S1
- : Vehicle front
terminal 56.

OK or NG PBIB3305E
OK >> GO TO 3.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III

DTC P0134 HO2S1
• “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes A
onds.
EC
C
SEF217YA
PBIB3648E G
CAUTION:
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread H
Without CONSULT-III
I
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- J
K
1 time: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V L
2 times: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V
→ 0 - 0.3 V
CAUTION: PBIA9566J M
one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread N
O

Refer to EM-169, "Removal and Installation". P

DTC P0135 HO2S1 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Engine coolant tempera- control
Engine coolant temperature sensor
ture
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine
speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine
is started.
OPERATION
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater

Above 3,400 rpm OFF
Below 3,400 rpm after warming up ON

ON
• Engine speed: Below 3,400 rpm
Trouble diagnosis
name
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor • Harness or connectors
Heated oxygen
P0135 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit
sensor 1 heater
0135 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM is open or shorted.)
control circuit
through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater.) • Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.

EC
ABBWA0374GB
P
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
3 G
heater
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
0 - Approximately 1.0 V
56 P Approximately 0 V

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

- : Vehicle front A
EC
PBIB3305E
D
3. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground with
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. F
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIA9576J
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H

• IPDM E/R connector E45
I
• 10 A fuse
• Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse
J
4.CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and HO2S1 terminal 3.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. N
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
P
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance

2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

CAUTION:
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface
such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool and
approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIA9577J


DTC P0138 HO2S2
DTC P0138 HO2S2
A
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), EC

from the heated oxygen sensor 2. C
age from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner con-
ditions. D
SEF327R E

HO2S2 (B1) • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following condi- 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0 V G
tions are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and LEAN ←→ RICH
at idle for 1 minute under no load H
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time I

longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen J
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during
the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
K
L
PBIB1848E
M
0138 circuit high voltage is sent to ECM. N
O
NOTE:
P

DTC P0138 HO2S2
ABBWA0375GB
CAUTION:

DTC P0138 HO2S2
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
EC
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
• Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions
are met. C
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
Heated oxygen sensor 2 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
5 G
heater under no load D
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
F
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly
after the following conditions are met.
50 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 - Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0 V
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and G
4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground H
• Idle speed
I
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS J

N
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front O
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0138 HO2S2
- : Vehicle front
- Heated oxygen sensor 2 (1)
terminal 59.

BBIA0700E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 ECM terminal 50.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2(B1)” as the monitor item with
CONSULT-III.

DTC P0138 HO2S2
6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
A
EC
PBIB3649E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. D
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.46 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E
F
Without CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 50 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. H
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) I
The voltage should be above 0.68 V and below 0.46 V at
least once during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed at step 6, step 7 is not nec- J
essary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position
with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). K
The voltage should be above 0.68 V and below 0.46 V at PBIB2996E
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. L
CAUTION:
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. M
N

Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation". O

DTC P0139 HO2S2
DTC P0139 HO2S2

ditions.
SEF327R

HO2S2 (B1) • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following condi- 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0 V
tions are met.

sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sen-
sor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condi-
tion such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2 It takes more time for the sensor to respond be- • Heated oxygen sensor 2
0139 circuit slow response tween rich and lean than the specified time. • Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
CAUTION:
NOTE:
• “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-III screen when all tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3”
are completed.
TESTING CONDITION:

DTC P0139 HO2S2
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry this procedure from step 2 in
Procedure for COND1. A
WITH CONSULT-III
Procedure for COND1 EC
For the best results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30°(32 to 86°F).
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C
5. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. D
7. Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
E
8. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm two or three times quickly under no load.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-III screen, go to step 2 in Procedure for COND3.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-III screen, go to the following step.
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-III F
screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 60 seconds.)
G
ENG SPEED More than 1,000 rpm
H
Shift level Suitable position
I
NOTE:
• If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2 in Procedure for COND1.
• If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CONSULT-III screen before Procedure for
COND2 is conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in Procedure for COND2. J
Procedure for COND2

1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completely with OD OFF (A/T) from the above condition [step 9] K
until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT-III screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
NOTE: L
If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-III screen before Procedure for COND3 is
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in Procedure for COND3.
Procedure for COND3 M
1. Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on CONSULT-III screen has turned to “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take a maximum of approximately 6 minutes.)
2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. N
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-316, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
O
b. Turn ignition switch ON and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
c. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-III.
d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°(158°F), go to Procedure for COND1 step 3. P
WITH GST

DTC P0139 HO2S2
3. Start engine and keep the engine between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
A change of voltage should be more than 0.12 V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
A change of voltage should be more than 0.12 V for 1 sec-
PBIB2996E
ond during this procedure.

DTC P0139 HO2S2
EC
ABBWA0375GB
P
CAUTION:

DTC P0139 HO2S2
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
are met.
5 G
heater under no load
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
DTC P0139 HO2S2
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. A
EC
Without CONSULT-III
C
nector. D
Diagnostic Information". E
Is it difficult to start engine? F
BBIA0701E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-325 or EC-331.
No >> GO TO 3. G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
- : Vehicle front
I
terminal 59.

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
BBIA0700E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 50. M

N
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
DTC P0139 HO2S2
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
5. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with
CONSULT-III.
PBIB3649E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-III
at least 10 times.
If the voltage can be confirmed at step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).

DTC P0139 HO2S2
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 A
EC
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 C

Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation".

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator

Engine speed
Engine coolant tempera- Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor heater control
ture
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
ON
• Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

HO2S2 HTR (B1) - Engine: After warming up
ON
Trouble diagnosis
name
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor • Harness or connectors
Heated oxygen
P0141 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit
sensor 2 heater
0141 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM is open or shorted.)
control circuit
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.

EC
ABBWA0376GB
P
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
are met.
5 G
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

- : Vehicle front A
EC
BBIA0700E
D
3. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground with
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. F
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIA9576J

I
• 10 A fuse
J
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 5 and HO2S2 terminal 3.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. N
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
P
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

Terminal No. Resistance

2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω

CAUTION:
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface
such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool and
approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIA9577J

Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation".

DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
A
With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the EC
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the C
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
E
Trouble diagnosis
name
• Intake air leaks F
• Fuel injector
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
P0171 Fuel injection system • Exhaust gas leaks
0171 too lean
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
• Incorrect fuel pressure
G
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
• Lack of fuel
• Incorrect PCV hose connection H
NOTE: I
WITH CONSULT-III J
K
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-III.
L
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-328,
M
"Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. N
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 min-
utes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. O
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time.
P
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
Engine coolant temperature (T) T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).

7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-328, "Diagnosis Procedure". If
engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
WITH GST
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let idle for at least 5 seconds.
nector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
9. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- BBIA0701E

NOTE:
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-328, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.

EC
AABWA0143GB
P
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
3 G
heater
PBIA8148J

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle

(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
PBIA4943J
[Engine is running]
1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

SEC502D
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace. A
2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
EC
2. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
C
3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
- : Vehicle front
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
terminal 49.
F
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 or HO2S1
G
terminal 4 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. PBIB3305E
Continuity should not exist. H

OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE J
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-201, "Fuel Pressure Check".
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-201, "Fuel Pressure Check".
K
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the instruction of EC-201, "Fuel Pressure Check".
5.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR M
With CONSULT-III
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. N
3. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
At idling : 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec:

O
At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10 g·m/sec:
With GST
1. Install all removed parts. P
3. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.

At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10 g·m/sec:
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-259.
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
With CONSULT-III
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-481.
PBIB3332E
7.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
4. Remove fuel injector gallery assembly. Refer to EC-481.
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel injector gallery.
The fuel injector harness connectors should remain connected.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays
out from fuel injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
PBIA9666J

Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

A
With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the EC
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the C
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D

Heated oxygen sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
E
Trouble diagnosis
name
• Heated oxygen sensor 1 F
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly. • Fuel injector
P0172 Fuel injection system
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too • Exhaust gas leaks
0172 too rich
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) • Incorrect fuel pressure
G
H
NOTE:
I
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. J
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-III.
4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. K
The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-334, L
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. M
utes. Refer to the table below. N
O
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) P
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.

If engine starts, go to EC-334, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
WITH GST
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let idle for at least 5 seconds.
nector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
9. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- BBIA0701E

NOTE:
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-334, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and
check for fouling, etc.

EC
AABWA0143GB
P
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
3 G
heater
PBIA8148J

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
idle

(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
PBIA4943J
[Engine is running]

SEC502D
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
C
3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector (1). D
- : Vehicle front
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM E
terminal 49.
Continuity should exist. F
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 or HO2S1

terminal 4 and ground.
G
Refer to Wiring Diagram. PBIB3305E

H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-201, "Fuel Pressure Check". J
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. L
NG >> Follow the instruction of EC-201, "Fuel Pressure Check".
With CONSULT-III M
3. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. N

At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10 g·m/sec: O
With GST
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. P
3. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.

At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10 g·m/sec:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-481.
PBIB3332E

1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EC-481.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

A

tion.
PBIB0145E E
F

G
TP SEN 1-B1
(Engine stopped)
TP SEN 2-B1* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. H
I
NOTE:
Refer to EC-440. J
P0222 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1
K
0222 1 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 • Electric throttle control actuator
0223 1 circuit high input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1) L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
M

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 N
degrees.
O
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at P
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

ALBWA0139GB
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire A
nal No. Color
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V EC
• Engine stopped C
Less than 4.75 V
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
34 O Throttle position sensor 2 E
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed
G
Sensor power supply

H

I
J
BBIA0698E M
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT P

tor.
- : Vehicle front
PBIB3325E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3646E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END
Refer to EC-245.
EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
D
4. Set selector lever to D (A/T), 1st (M/T) position. E
34 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
F
33 Fully released More than 0.36 V G


(Throttle position sensor 2) H
Fully depressed More than 0.36 V
PBIB3038E
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
I
J

Refer to EM-165, "Removal and Installation". K

DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER
MISFIRE
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (POS) signal every 200 engine revo-
lutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire
Multiple cylinder misfire. • Improper spark plug
0300 detected
• Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire de- • Incorrect fuel pressure
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
0301 tected • Fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
• Fuel injector
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire
No. 2 cylinder misfires. • Intake air leak
0302 detected
• The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire • Lack of fuel
No. 3 cylinder misfires.
0303 detected • Drive plate or flywheel
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire
No. 4 cylinder misfires. • Incorrect PCV hose connection
0304 detected
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing.
NOTE:
3. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
NOTE:
2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to table below.

FIRE
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con- A
dition should be satisfied at the same time:
EC
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F)
(T) condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or C
equal to 70°C (158°F)
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Refer to the following table. D
Engine speed Time

E
Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
F
1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE G
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.

2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. K
3.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-III L
3. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
M
Without CONSULT-III
When disconnecting each fuel injector (1) harness connector one at N
a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
O
PBIA9870J
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
FIRE
No >> GO TO 7.
Does each fuel injector make an operating sound at idle?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Check fuel injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-481.
PBIB3332E
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I

CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse (1) in IPDM E/R (2) to release fuel pres-
sure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres-
sure applies again during the following procedure.
- : Vehicle front
3. Start engine.
pressure.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri- PBIB2958E
cal discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm (0.52 -
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal
portion as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal por-
tion.
Spark should be generated.

CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50 cm (19.7 in). Be careful not to get an electrical JMBIA0066GB
shock while checking, because the electrical discharge

voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm (0.52 in), the spark might be generated even if the coil is mal-
functioning.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.
FIRE
Spark should be generated. A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-491. EC
7.CHECK SPARK PLUG
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. C
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-257, "Standard and Limit". D
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 8.
E
SEF156I F
8.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
2. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and G
the grounded portion.
Spark should be generated. H

OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-257, "Standard I
and Limit".
9.CHECK SPARK PLUGS J
Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. K
NG >> Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type
one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-257, "Standard
and Limit".
L
M
SEF156I
10.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

N
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-213, "On-Vehicle Service".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
O
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
1. Install all removed parts. P
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-201, "Fuel Pressure Check".
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

FIRE
NG >> GO TO 12.
• Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-486.)
• Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-201, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
• Fuel lines
• Fuel filter for clogging
>> Repair or replace.

Check the following items. Refer to EC-193, "Basic Inspection".
Items Specifications
Target idle speed
Ignition timing
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Follow the EC-193, "Basic Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
With CONSULT-III
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
At idling : 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec

At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
At idling : 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec

At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-209, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
17.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-175, "Emission-related
FIRE
>> GO TO 18. A
Refer to EC-245. EC
>> INSPECTION END

C

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
The knock sensor (1) is attached to the cylinder block. It senses

engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pres-
sure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
• : Vehicle front
PBIB3264E
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause
P0327 Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0327 input sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Knock sensor
0328 input sent to ECM.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
EC
BBWA2683E
P
CAUTION:

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
[Engine is running]
37 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5 V
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
40 — • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(Knock sensor)
• Idle speed
1.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 37 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor (1) harness connector.
- : Vehicle front
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 37 and knock
sensor terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. PBIB3264E
3.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.
Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body.
BBIA0698E

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
: Vehicle front A
4. Body ground E15
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
C
5.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Reconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and ground. D
Continuity should exist

3. Also check harness for short to power. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. F
Refer to EC-245. G
>> INSPECTION END

H
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. I
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ. J
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]

CAUTION: K
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
L
SEF227W
M
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-230, "Disassembly and Assembly".
N

The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at
the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine rev-
olution.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
change.
changes.
PBIA9209J
PBIB2997E

• Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the ta-
ENG SPEED
tion. chometer indication.
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not
circuit is open or shorted.)
detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of
engine cranking.
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit
P0335 Crankshaft position sen- • The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position
is shorted.)
0335 sor (POS) circuit sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is
running.
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in
(APP sensor 2)
the normal pattern during engine running.
• Signal plate
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V with igni-
tion switch ON.

2. Check 1st trip DTC. A
EC
ABBWA0377GB

CAUTION:
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
Approximately 4.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
Crankshaft position PBIB2998E

61 W
sensor (POS)
Approximately 4.0 V
[Engine is running]
PBIB2999E

62 R [Crankshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
Sensor power supply
74 W (Refrigerant pressure sen- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
sor)
Sensor power supply
75 BR [Crankshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
102 SB [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
(APP sensor 2)

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front

4. Body ground E15 A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. EC
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) (1) harness C
connector.
D
PBIB3326E
F
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and

ground with CONSULT-III or tester. G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
I
PBIA9583J
J
3.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
3. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ECM terminal 75.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. M
NG >> Repair open circuit.
4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. N
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram

O
74 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-501, "Wiring Diagram"
75 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) terminal 1 EC-353, "Wiring Diagram"
102 APP sensor terminal 5 EC-462, "Wiring Diagram" P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-502, "Diagnosis Procedure".

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
6.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
11.CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace the signal plate.
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

A
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
EC
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. C
PBIA9210J
F
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
G
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ Ω H
2 (+) - 3 (-)
6. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
I
PBIA9584J
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006029550 J
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to EM-230, "Disassembly and Assembly". K

The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of

signals.
PBIA9875J
change.
PBIB2997E
NOTE:
EC-440.
P0340 Camshaft position sensor • The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM dur-
• Camshaft (Intake)
0340 (PHASE) circuit ing engine running.
• Starter motor (Refer to SC-8.)
• Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-8.)
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
4. Maintain engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.

EC
BBWA2685E
P
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
63 BR [Camshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
1.0 - 2.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
idle

65 G
(PHASE)
1.0 - 2.0 V
[Engine is running]
PBIB2987E
Sensor power supply

(PHASE)]
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over?

Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-8.)
BBIA0698E

: Vehicle front A
4. Body ground E15
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
C
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) (1) har-
ness connector. D
- : Vehicle front
E
PBIB3327E
G
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I
J
PBIA9583J
4.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K
3. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2 and ECM terminal 63.
L

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. N
5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ECM terminal 65. O
Continuity should exist. P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
PBIA9557J

Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIA9876J
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ Ω
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIA9584J
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)


DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
A
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen EC

sensors 1 and 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 C
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2
approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold) D
malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF484YF E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
• Three way catalyst (manifold)
• Exhaust tube
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate
• Intake air leaks G
P0420 Catalyst system efficiency properly.
• Fuel injector
0420 below threshold • Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
• Fuel injector leaks
enough oxygen storage capacity.
• Spark plug
• Improper ignition timing H
NOTE: I
J
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
• Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
• Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below. K
L
5. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. M
6. Start engine.
7. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator
pedal completely. N
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “COMPLT”, go to step 10
8. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It O
will take approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) P
d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°(158°F), go to step 3.
10. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.

11. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-364, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st
WITH GST
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 49 (HO2S1 signal)
and ground, and ECM terminal 50 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.
6. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
PBIA9566J
7. Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)
between ECM terminal 50 and ground is very less than that of
ECM terminal 49 and ground.
Switching frequency ratio = A/B
A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 voltage switching frequency
B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 voltage switching frequency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst
does not operate properly. Go to EC-364, "Diagnosis Proce-
dure".
NOTE: PBIB3000E
If the voltage at terminal 49 does not switch periodically more than 5
times within 10 seconds at step 7, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0133 first. (See EC-287.)
1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
SEC502D
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
C
Check the following items. Refer to EC-193, "Basic Inspection".
D
Items Specifications
Target idle speed E
Ignition timing
M/T: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the EC-193, "Basic Inspection". G
1. Stop engine and turn ignition switch OFF. H
4. Check voltage between ECM terminals 25, 29, 30, 31 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Refer to Wiring Diagram for fuel injectors, EC-482, "Wiring Dia- I
gram".
Voltage: Battery voltage J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-483, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
L
PBIB3001E

CAUTION: M
N
sure.
NOTE:
sure applies again during the following procedure. O
- : Vehicle front
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel P
pressure.
cal discharge from the ignition coils.

tion.

CAUTION:

NOTE:
functioning.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-491.
8.CHECK SPARK PLUG
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-257, "Standard and Limit".
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 9.
SEF156I


OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-257, "Standard
and Limit".

2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
Refer to EM-182. A
4. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
EC
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
C
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D
Refer to EC-245.
Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END E

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold).

DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


EVAP canister EVAP canister purge volume
Throttle position sensor Throttle position purge flow control control solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor Closed throttle position
Vehicle speed*2
Combination meter
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
PBIA9215J

PURG VOL C/V (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 0 - 50%
• No load

• Harness or connectors EC
(EVAP canister purge volume control
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent solenoid valve circuit is open or short-
control solenoid valve circuit
0444 to ECM through the valve ed.)
open C
• EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve

D
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. E
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
F

BBWA2686E
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
C
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
D
EVAP canister purge vol-
9 P PBIB0050E
ume control solenoid valve
Approximately 10 V E
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than F
100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E G
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
• For a few seconds after turning ignition switch H
ECM relay OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V) I
switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
J

K
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
L
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
(1) harness connector.
- : Vehicle front
3. Turn ignition switch ON. M
O
PBIB3306E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or
tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0148E

• IPDM E/R harness connector E43
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 9 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 5.
4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed var-
ies according to the valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

A
With CONSULT-III EC
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
C
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes
D
0% No
E
PBIA9668J
Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control F
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Air passage continuity G

Condition
between A and B
12 V direct current supply between termi-
Yes
nals 1 and 2 H
No supply No
PBIA9560J
I
J
K

DTC P0500 VSS
DTC P0500 VSS
NOTE:
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-252.
to EC-254.
The vehicle speed signal is sent from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” or combination meter
through CAN communication line.
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from (The CAN communication line is open or short-
P0500
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even ed.)
0500
when vehicle is being driven. • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Combination meter
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected item Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

When the fail-safe system for vehicle speed sensor is activated, the cooling g fan operates (High) while
Vehicle speed sensor
engine is running.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. The vehicle speed on CON-
SULT-III should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-375, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If OK, go to following steps.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.

PW/ST SIGNAL OFF

DTC P0500 VSS
A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST EC
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine.
C
3. Read vehicle speed signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed signal on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
D
E
1.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Refer to BRC-9.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER G
Check combination meter function.

Refer to DI-4. H
>> INSPECTION END

I

DTC P0605 ECM
DTC P0605 ECM
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

PBIA9222J
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. • ECM
0605
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A
degrees) by the return spring.
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no problem on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B,
perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times.

DTC P0605 ECM
A
1.INSPECTION START EC
1. Erase DTC.
2. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-376, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
3. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? C
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
D
No >> INSPECTION END
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. E
F
G
>> INSPECTION END

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

or stops oil flow.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
position.
PBIB1842E

(M/T) Approx. 0% - 90%
quickly
• No load
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM • Harness or connectors
P1111 Intake valve timing control
through intake valve timing control solenoid (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
1111 solenoid valve circuit
valve. • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC
ABBWA0378GB
P
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
• For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
switch OFF
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
7 - 10 V
Intake valve timing control
73 P
solenoid valve [Engine is running]
• When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly
PBIA4937J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve (1) har-
ness connector.
PBIB3323E
4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9590J
2.DETECT MALFUNCTION PART

• Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
A
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN EC
AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. C
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 73 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve termi-
nal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. D

OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END I
J
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid K
valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance L
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.) M
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIA9591J N

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger O
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve P
NOTE:
PBIA9558J



A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. EC
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening C
D
E
Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
P1121 Electric throttle control F
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is • Electric throttle control actuator
1121 actuator B)
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
H
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. I
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T), and engine speed will not exceed J
1,000 rpm or more.

K
NOTE:
• Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B M
N
O
8. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. P
9. Check DTC.

5. Check DTC.
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1)
and the housing.
- : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
BBIA0711E

>> INSPECTION END

A
NOTE: EC
or P1126. Refer to EC-383 or EC-391.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. C
response to driving condition. D
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. E
• Harness or connectors F
P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
1122 performance ate properly. shorted)
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
H
spring. I
NOTE: J
TESTING CONDITION: K
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V when
engine is running.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. L
3. Check DTC.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-387, "Diagnosis Procedure". M

ALBWA0129GB
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
EC
0 - 14 V

C
1 L
D
PBIB1105E

power supply (11 - 14 V) E
0 - 14 V
[Ignition switch: ON] F

4 P
(Close) • Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
G
PBIB1104E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF] H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I

N
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front O
4. Body ground E15
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

Check voltage between ECM terminal 2 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions with CONSULT-III or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage

OFF Approximately 0 V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14 V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 3. PBIA9568J
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
5.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
SULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIA9569J
6.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> GO TO 7.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

EC
C
8.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15 A fuse.
2. Check 15 A fuse for blown. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace 15 A fuse. E
Refer to EC-245. F
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. G
10.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator (1) harness connec- H
tor.
- : Vehicle front
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
J
Electric throttle control
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
1 Should not exist. K
5 PBIB3325E
4 Should exist.
1 Should exist.
6 L
4 Should not exist.
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY N
2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1)
and the housing. O
- : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. P
BBIA0711E
12.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 14.
Refer to EC-245.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
>> INSPECTION END

THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]

3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
PBIB3647E


A
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle EC
provided to the ECM. C
Specification data are reference values. D

E
F
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause G
P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1124 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)
H
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open) I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
J

K
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000006029601 L
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at M
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 seconds. N
2. Check DTC.
O
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V.
P
3. Check DTC.

ALBWA0130GB
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
EC
0 - 14 V

C
1 L
D
PBIB1105E

0 - 14 V

4 P
G
PBIB1104E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I J

SULT-III or tester. K

L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
M
PBIA9569J
N
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E46. O
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 15 and IPDM E/R terminal 46.
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
4.CHECK FUSE
2. Check 15 A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 2 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions with CONSULT-III or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage

OFF Approximately 0 V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14 V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6. PBIA9568J

4. Check continuity between ECM terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
Refer to EC-245.
OK or NG

A
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC
C

D
• Harness or connectors E
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
1128 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. • Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
F
FAIL-SAFE MODE
G
spring.
H
NOTE: I
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. J
3. Check DTC.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnosis Procedure". K

ALBWA0131GB
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
EC
0 - 14 V

C
1 L
D
PBIB1105E

0 - 14 V

4 P
G
PBIB1104E
BATTERY VOLTAGE

N
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front O
4. Body ground E15
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

tor.
- : Vehicle front
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.

ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
1 Should not exist.
5 PBIB3325E
4 Should exist.
1 Should exist.
6
4 Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.
Refer to EC-245.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]

3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
PBIB3647E

A
EC

DTC P1143 HO2S1
DTC P1143 HO2S1

V.
SEF463R
SEF288D

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0 V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) rpm Changes more than 5 times dur-
ing 10 seconds.
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor
1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently
high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected.
SEF300U

DTC P1143 HO2S1
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause A
• Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
P1143 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The maximum and minimum voltage from the
1143 lean shift monitoring sensor are not reached to the specified voltages.
• Fuel pressure EC
• Fuel injector
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000006029614 C
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. D
NOTE:
E
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
F
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds. G
with CONSULT-III.
4. Touch “START”. H
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,400 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, I
return to step 5.
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 50 J
seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED 1,350 - 3,400 rpm K

L
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC- M
N
WITH GST O
P

DTC P1143 HO2S1
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
constant under no load.
• The minimum voltage is over 0.1 V at least 1 time.
PBIA9566J

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
• : Vehicle front
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB2966E

With CONSULT-III
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected?

DTC P1143 HO2S1
Without CONSULT-III A
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. EC
nector.
5. Make sure that DTC P0102 is displayed. C
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. D
BBIA0701E
Yes or No E
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-325.
No >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J
Refer to EC-245.
For circuit, refer to EC-290, "Wiring Diagram".
K
>> INSPECTION END
L

With CONSULT-III M
N
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-III screen. O

DTC P1143 HO2S1
onds.
SEF217YA
PBIB3648E
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-III
1 time: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V
2 times: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V
→ 0 - 0.3 V
CAUTION: PBIA9566J
one.


DTC P1144 HO2S1
DTC P1144 HO2S1
A

V.
SEF463R E
SEF288D
I
Specification data are reference values. J

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0 V
K
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) rpm Changes more than 5 times dur-
ing 10 seconds.
L
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor M
1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently
high and “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are
shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected.
N
SEF299U
P
P1144 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The maximum and minimum voltages from the • Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
1144 rich shift monitoring sensor are beyond the specified voltages. • Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

DTC P1144 HO2S1
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
return to step 5.
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 50
seconds or more.)

7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
WITH GST
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
constant under no load.
• The maximum voltage is below 0.8 V at least 1 time.
PBIA9566J

DTC P1144 HO2S1
2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. A
EC
BBIA0698E
E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. G
H
• : Vehicle front
Tightening torque: 50 N·m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb) I
>> GO TO 3. J
PBIB2966E
K
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. L
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. M
N
Without CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector, and O
nector. P
BBIA0701E

DTC P1144 HO2S1
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 4.
- : Vehicle front
3. Check connectors for water.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
PBIB3305E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
Refer to EC-245.
For circuit, refer to EC-290, "Wiring Diagram".
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III

DTC P1144 HO2S1
• “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes A
onds.
EC
C
SEF217YA
PBIB3648E G
CAUTION:
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread H
Without CONSULT-III
I
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- J
K
1 time: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V L
2 times: 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V
→ 0 - 0.3 V
CAUTION: PBIA9566J M
one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread N
O


DTC P1146 HO2S2
DTC P1146 HO2S2

ditions.
SEF327R

tions are met.

storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is
sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB3307E
P1146 Heated oxygen sensor 2 The minimum voltage from the sensor is not
1146 minimum voltage monitoring reached to the specified voltage.
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
CAUTION:
NOTE:
are completed.
• If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
TESTING CONDITION:

DTC P1146 HO2S2
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry procedure from step 2 in Pro-
cedure for COND1 A
WITH CONSULT-III
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
E
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-III screen, go to step 2 in Procedure for COND3”.
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-III F
G
H
I
NOTE:
Procedure for COND2

1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completed with OD OFF (A/T) from the above condition [step 9] K
until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT-III screen has turned to “COMPLETED” (It will take
NOTE:
If “COMPLETE” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-III screen before Procedure for COND3 L
is conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in Procedure for COND3.
Procedure for COND3
M
2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
N
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, performed the following.
O
d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F), go to Procedure for COND1 step 3. P
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the operating temperature.

DTC P1146 HO2S2
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be below 0.46 V at least once during this
procedure.
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
The voltage should be below 0.46 V at least once during this
PBIB2996E
procedure.

DTC P1146 HO2S2
EC
ABBWA0375GB
P
CAUTION:

DTC P1146 HO2S2
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
are met.
5 G
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
DTC P1146 HO2S2
EC
Without CONSULT-III
C
nector. D
BBIA0701E
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 3. G
- : Vehicle front
I
terminal 59.

BBIA0700E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.


N
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
DTC P1146 HO2S2
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III.
PBIB3649E
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-III
at least 10 times.
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
CAUTION:

DTC P1146 HO2S2
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006029635 EC

Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation". C

DTC P1147 HO2S2
DTC P1147 HO2S2

ditions.
SEF327R

tions are met.

sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor
is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-
cut.
SEF259VA
(The sensor circuit open or shorted.)
P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2 max- The maximum voltage from the sensor is not • Heated oxygen sensor 2
1147 imum voltage monitoring reached to the specified voltage. • Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
CAUTION:
NOTE:
are completed.
• If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
TESTING CONDITION:

DTC P1147 HO2S2
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry procedure from step 2 in “Pro-
cedure for COND1” A
WITH CONSULT-III
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
E
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-III screen, go to step 2 in “Procedure for COND3”.
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at COND1” on the CONSULT-III F
G
H
I
NOTE:
Procedure for COND2

1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completed with OD OFF (A/T) from the above condition [step 9] K
until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT-III screen has turned to “COMPLETED” (It will take
NOTE:
If “COMPLETE” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-III screen before Procedure for COND3 L
is conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND3”.
Procedure for COND3
M
2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
N
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
O
d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F), go to Procedure for COND1 step 3. P
WITH GST

DTC P1147 HO2S2
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be above 0.68 V at least once during
this procedure.
essary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
The voltage should be above 0.68 V at least once during
PBIB2996E
this procedure.

DTC P1147 HO2S2
EC
ABBWA0375GB
P
CAUTION:

DTC P1147 HO2S2
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
are met.
5 G
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
DTC P1147 HO2S2
EC
Without CONSULT-III
C
nector. D
BBIA0701E
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 3. G
- : Vehicle front
I
terminal 59.

BBIA0700E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.


N
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
DTC P1147 HO2S2
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III.
PBIB3649E
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-III
at least 10 times.
essary.
with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
CAUTION:

DTC P1147 HO2S2
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006029644 EC

Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation". C

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-252.
to EC-254.
Cooling Fan Control


Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R
Combination meter control (Cooling fan relays)
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
MODELS WITH A/C
PBIB2852E
MODELS WITHOUT A/C
PBIB3335E

The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line. A
Cooling fan relay

Cooling fan speed EC
1 2 3
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF OFF
C
High (HI) ON ON ON

D
Monitor item Condition Specification E

• Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.) F
OFF
(207°F) or less
• Engine: After warming up, idle G
Engine coolant temperature is be-
COOLING FAN the engine LOW
tween 98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)
HIGH H
(212°F) or more
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will I
rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction
is indicated.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. J
• Harness or connectors K
(The cooling fan circuit is open or short-
heat). • Cooling fan
L
• Cooling fan system does not operate properly • IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays)
P1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat). • Radiator hose
1217 (Overheat) • Engine coolant was not added to the system • Radiator
using the proper filling method. • Radiator cap M
• Engine coolant is not within the specified • Water pump
range. • Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-433,
"Main 13 Causes of Overheating". N
CAUTION:
Coolant". Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-18, "Changing Engine Oil". O
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to CO-23, "Changing Engine Coolant".
P
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.

Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
WITH CONSULT-III
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-430,
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-430,
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-III. SEF621W
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-430, "Diagnosis Procedure".

WITH GST
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-430,
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-430,
3. Perform IPDM/ER auto active test and check cooling fan motor
operation. Refer to PG-19, "Auto Active Test".
4. If NG, go to EC-430, "Diagnosis Procedure". SEF621W

EC
BBWA2997E
P

ALBWA0132GB
1.INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-III?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.

2.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION A

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. EC
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at each speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. C
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Refer to "CHECK COOLING FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT".)
3.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
D
Without CONSULT-III
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan operation.
Refer to PG-19, "Auto Active Test".
2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at each speed. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Refer to "CHECK COOLING FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT".) F
4.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the G
pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi) H

CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-23, "Inspec- SLC756AA J
tion".
• Hose
• Radiator
• Water pump K
5.CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Apply pressure to cap with a tester. L
Radiator cap relief 59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar,

pressure: 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi) M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace radiator cap. N
SLC755AC O
6.CHECK COMPONENT PARTS
• Thermostat. (Refer to CO-34.) P
• Water control valve. (Refer to CO-37.)
• Engine coolant temperature sensor. (Refer to EC-274, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.

7.CHECK MAIN 13 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-433, "Main 13 Causes of Overheating".
>> INSPECTION END

CHECK COOLING FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT
1.CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2067E

• 50 A fusible link (Models with A/C)
• 40 A fusible link (Models without A/C)
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E46 and E48.
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminals 59, 39 and ground.

OK or NG
OK (Models with A/C)>>GO TO 4.
OK (Models without A/C)>>GO TO 6.
4.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between the followings;
Cooling fan motor terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminals 20, 24.
Cooling fan motor terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and IPDM E/R A
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground
• Resistor E5
EC
6.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT
C
2. Check harness continuity between the followings;
Cooling fan motor terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 20.
Cooling fan motor terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 24. D
Cooling fan motor terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 23.
Cooling fan motor terminal 4 and ground.
Refer to wiring diagram. E

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7. G
H
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground
I
8.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR
Refer to EC-434, "Component Inspection". J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motor. K
Perform EC-245. L
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. M
Main 13 Causes of Overheating INFOID:0000000006029651
N
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 • Blocked radiator • Visual No blocking
• Blocked condenser O
—
• Blocked bumper
2 • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture CO-23, "Changing Engine
Coolant".
P
3 • Coolant level • Visual Coolant up to MAX level in
reservoir tank and radiator CO-23, "Inspection".
filler neck
4 • Radiator cap • Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa
(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 CO-26, "Checking Radia-
tor Cap".
kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi) (Limit)

ON*2 5 • Coolant leaks • Visual No leaks CO-23, "Inspection".
ON*2 6 • Thermostat • Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-34, "Removal and In-
lower radiator hoses stallation".
ON*1 7 • Cooling fan • CONSULT-III Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-430, "Di-
agnosis Procedure").
OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak • Color checker chemical Negative
—
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 • Coolant temperature • Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when

—
gauge driving
• Coolant overflow to res- • Visual No overflow during driving
CO-23, "Inspection".
ervoir tank and idling
OFF*4 10 • Coolant return from res- • Visual Should be initial level in

CO-23, "Inspection".
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank
OFF 11 • Water control valve • Remove and inspect Within the specified value CO-37, "Removal and In-
the valve stallation".
OFF 12 • Cylinder head • Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-213, "On-Vehicle Ser-
gauge mum distortion (warping) vice".
13 • Cylinder block and pis- • Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-230, "Disassembly
tons walls or piston and Assembly".
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
For more information, refer to CO-19.
COOLING FAN MOTOR

Model with A/C
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Terminals
(+) (-)
Cooling fan motor 1 2
Cooling fan motor should operate.
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
SEF888V
Models without A/C

check operation.
terminals
Speed
(+) (−)
1 4
Low
High 1 and 2 3 and 4 SEF734W

If NG, replace cooling fan motor. A
EC

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR

a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
PBIB0145E
tion.
P1225 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- • Electric throttle control actuator
1225 learning performance sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:

and the housing.
- : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0711E

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END A
EC
C

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR

a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
PBIB0145E
tion.
P1226 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- • Electric throttle control actuator
1226 learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for 32 times.

and the housing.
- : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0711E


DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
3. Perform EC-199, "Idle Air Volume Learning". A
>> INSPECTION END

EC

C

Trouble diagnosis
name
(Throttle position sensor circuit is shorted.)
[Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM detects a voltage of power source for
shorted.]
1229 circuit short sensor is excessively low or high.
(APP sensor 1)
• Throttle position sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE

spring.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

EC
ALBWA0133GB
P
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
Sensor power supply
Sensor power supply
(PHASE)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 GR
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
106 P [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
(APP sensor 1)
110 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
111 R • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(APP sensor 1)
• Idle speed

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor (1)
harness connector. A
EC
BBIA0705E D
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with

CONSULT-III or tester. E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIA9606J
3.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS H
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
I
72 Throttle position sensor terminal 2 EC-468, "Wiring Diagram"
78 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 EC-359, "Wiring Diagram" J
106 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-441, "Wiring Diagram"
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) L
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. O
NG >> GO TO 6.
P
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
>> INSPECTION END

Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

A
When the shift lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), transmission range switch (A/T), park/neutral posi- EC
tion (PNP) switch (M/T) is ON.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000006029668 C

D
Shift lever: Except above OFF E
F
The park/neutral position (PNP) signal is not G
P1706 (PNP signal circuit is open or shorted.)
Park/neutral position switch changed in the process of engine starting and
1706 • Transmission range switch (A/T)
driving.
H
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. I
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” sig- K
nal under the following conditions.
L
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
N or P position (A/T)
ON
M
If NG, go to EC-448, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If OK, go to following steps. N
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. O

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) P
VHCL SPEED SE More than 64km/h (29 MPH)

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit. During this
WITH GST
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 69 (PNP signal) and
ground under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage (Known-good data)

P or N position (A/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE
Neutral position (M/T) (11 - 14 V)
Except above position Approx. 0 V
PBIA9570J

EC
ABBWA0379GB
P
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
Park/neutral position • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) (11 - 14 V)
69 L
(PNP) signal [Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 0 V
A/T MODELS
1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect transmission range switch harness connector.
4. Check voltage between transmission range terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB3002E

• 10 A fuse
• Harness for open or short between transmission range switch and fuse
3.CHECK PNP SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between transmission range switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 69.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
Refer to AT-183, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace transmission range switch.
Refer to EC-245.

>> INSPECTION END
A
M/T MODELS
1.CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC
2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
4. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground with C

D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. E
PBIB3003E
F
• Harness connectors E8, F8 G
• IPDM E/R Harness connector E43
• 10 A fuse
• Harness for open or short between PNP switch and fuse H
3.CHECK PNP SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I

J
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 3 and ECM terminal 69.
Continuity should exist. K

OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PNP SWITCH M
Refer to AT-183, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. N
NG >> Replace PNP switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT O
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END P

DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR
DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR
ECM receives input speed sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for
engine control.

I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12MPH)
tachometer indication
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-252.
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1010 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010.
Refer to EC-254.
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0335, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335. Refer
to EC-352.
to EC-358.
to EC-376.
(The CAN communication line is open or
Input speed sensor signal is different from
shorted)
P1715 Input speed sensor the theoretical value calculated by ECM
1715 (TCM output) from revolution sensor signal and engine
(Input speed sensor circuit is open or
rpm signal.
shorted)
• TCM
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2.REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to AT-215, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

A
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. EC
C

D
E

F
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for • Harness or connectors
P1805 G
Brake switch extremely long time while the vehicle is driv- (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
1805
ing. • Stop lamp switch
FAIL-SAFE MODE H
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode.
Engine operation condition in fail-fail safe mode I

ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Vehicle condition Driving condition J
K
1. Turn ignition switch ON. L

2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC.
4. Check 1st trip DTC. M

ALBWA0135GB
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire A
Item Condition Data (Dc Voltage)
nal No. Color
Approximately 0 V
99 R Stop lamp switch EC
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14 V)
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006029683 C
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
E
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. G
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch (1) harness connector.
H
BBIA0710E
K
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
L
PBIB2284E
Voltage: Battery voltage O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. P
NG >> GO TO 3.
• 10 A fuse
• Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery

4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch (1) harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 99.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

STOP LAMP SWITCH

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
PBIB2285E
Condition Continuity
Brake pedal: Fully released. Should not exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to EC-453, "Diagnosis Procedure", and perform step 3
again.

A

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The D
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
F

G

ACCEL SEN 1 H

ACCEL SEN 2*
I
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage. J
K
NOTE:
Refer to EC-440. L
M
P2123 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP • Accelerator pedal position sensor
2123 sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1) N
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. O

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 P
degrees.
NOTE:

TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.
ALBWA0136GB

A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- EC
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color C
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 GR
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON] E
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
106 P [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V G
(APP sensor 1)
Accelerator pedal position • Accelerator pedal: Fully released H
110 G
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed I
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
• Idle speed
J
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS K

Refer to EC-251, "Ground Inspection". L
O
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front P
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor (1) harness
connector.
BBIA0705E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and APP sensor terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

4. Perform EC-199, "Idle Air Volume Learning". A
>> INSPECTION END

Refer to EC-245.
C
>> INSPECTION END
D
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
E
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 103 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
F
conditions.

G
110 Fully released 0.6 - 0.9 V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7 V
H
sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.4 V PBIA9572J
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. I

J
K
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3, "Removal and Installation".
L

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
signals.
PBIB1741E

ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.
is shorted.]
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP shorted.)
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. • Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

degrees.

A
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC
TESTING CONDITION:
C
2. Check DTC.
D

ABBWA0381GB
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire A
nal No. Color
Sensor power supply
EC
sor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)] C
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 GR
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
106 P
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V G
110 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
• Idle speed
J

O
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front P
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

connector.
BBIA0705E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9607J
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 102.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-357, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-502, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.

6.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

EC

C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. D
7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 103 and APP sensor terminal 6. E
Continuity should exist. F

OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. I
NG >> GO TO 9.
J
4. Perform EC-199, "Idle Air Volume Learning". K
>> INSPECTION END

L
Refer to EC-245.
M
>> INSPECTION END
N

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. O

conditions.


4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.

ACCELERATOR PEDAL

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
A

tion.
PBIB0145E E
F

G
TP SEN 1-B1 Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V
(Engine stopped)
TP SEN 2-B1*
H
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
I
NOTE:
If DTC P2135 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to J
EC-440.
K
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or short-
P2135 Throttle position sensor
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 ed.)
2135 circuit range/performance L
and TP sensor 2. • Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. M

N
degrees.
So, the acceleration will be poor. O
NOTE: P
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
ALBWA0141GB
CAUTION:

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
EC
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released C
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) D
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V E
• Engine stopped F
More than 0.36 V
[Engine is running] G
Sensor ground
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
72 V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V H
I
2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. J
BBIA0698E
N
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15 O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. P
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
tor.
: Vehicle front
PBIB3325E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3646E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 33, elec-
tric throttle control actuator terminal 3 and ECM terminal 34.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END A

Refer to EC-245. EC
>> INSPECTION END

C

D
3. Turn ignition switch ON. E
4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T).
34 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi- F
tions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage G

33 Fully released More than 0.36 V
H
(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36 V
PBIB3038E
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next I
step.
8. Perform EC-199, "Idle Air Volume Learning". J
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR K



signals.
PBIB1741E

ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.

NOTE:
EC-440.
shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM is shorted.]
P2138
tion sensor circuit range/ compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
2138
performance and APP sensor 2. shorted.)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode A

degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. EC

C
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. D
TESTING CONDITION:
E
2. Check DTC.
F

ABBWA0382GB
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire A
nal No. Color
Sensor power supply
EC
sor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)] C
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 GR
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
106 P
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V G
110 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
• Idle speed
J

O
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front P
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

connector.
BBIA0705E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIA9607J

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 102.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.


A
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK COMPONENTS C
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-357, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-502, "Diagnosis Procedure".) D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning component. E
7.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and APP sensor terminal 2, ECM terminal 104 and
APP sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. G

H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. I
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 110 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 103 and J
APP sensor terminal 6.
K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR M

OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY O
3. Perform EC-199, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". P
>> INSPECTION END

Refer to EC-245.

>> INSPECTION END


conditions.


4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.

ACCELERATOR PEDAL

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
A
Specification data are reference values. EC

Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting C
ON
switch is in 2nd position.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch
OFF
is OFF.
D
Heater fan is operating. ON
Heater fan is not operating. OFF
E
1.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

F
2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III under the following conditions.
G
Condition LOAD SIGNAL
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch: OFF OFF H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 4. I
2.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III under the following conditions. J
Condition LOAD SIGNAL

Rear window defogger switch: ON ON K
Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION M
Check “HEATER FAN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III under the following conditions.
Condition HEATER FAN SW N

Heater fan control switch: ON ON
Heater fan control switch: OFF OFF
O
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END.
NG >> GO TO 6. P
4.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-6.
>> INSPECTION END

5.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to GW-50.
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to ATC-26 (AUTO A/C), MTC-25 (MANUAL A/C).
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR
A
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM EC
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec-
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura- C
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs. D
PBIA9664J E

B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-237. G
INJ PULSE-B1 • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral H
(M/T) 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• No load

FUEL INJECTOR
AABWA0144GB
CAUTION:

FUEL INJECTOR
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition C
• Idle speed
NOTE:
idle D
30 O Fuel injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE E

(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
F
G
PBIA4943J
H
1.INSPECTION START I
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No J
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION K
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine. L
M
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
N
PBIB3332E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.

FUEL INJECTOR
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel injector (1) harness connector.
PBIA9870J
4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0582E

• 10 A fuse
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse
5.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 25, 29, 30, 31.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuel injector.
Refer to EC-245.

FUEL INJECTOR
>> INSPECTION END
A
FUEL INJECTOR
EC
1. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
C
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5 Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
PBIA9579J
F
FUEL INJECTOR
G

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator

Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage*
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and cam-
shaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the
engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump
operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel
pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation

Ignition switch is turned to ON Operates for 1 second
Engine running and cranking Operates
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds
Except as shown above Stops
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
• Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (1)
• Fuel pressure regulator (2)
• Fuel level sensor (3)
• Fuel tank temperature sensor (4)
BBIA0704E

ON

FUEL PUMP
EC
ABBWA0383GB
P
CAUTION:

FUEL PUMP
Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.0 V
[Engine is running]
23 GR Fuel pump relay
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
switch ON
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Pinch fuel feed hose (1) with two fingers.
- Illustration shows the view with intake air duct removed.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed

hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0712E
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

SULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9573J
3.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 12.
PBIB3303E

FUEL PUMP
• Harness connectors E8, F8 A
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors. EC

5.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
C
3. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector (1).
- : Vehicle front D
- Illustration shows the view with rear seat removed.
E
F
BBIA0702E
G
5. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Battery voltage should exist for 1 second H

Voltage:
after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
J
MBIB1446E
6.CHECK 15 A FUSE
3. Check 15 A fuse.
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse.
7.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV M

2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 36 and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” termi-
nal 1. N
Continuity should exist. O

OK or NG
P
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 8.
• Harness connectors E7, M69
• Harness connectors M12, B101
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”

FUEL PUMP
9.CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
• Harness connectors B133, D400
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground

11.CHECK FUEL PUMP
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace fuel pump.
Refer to EC-245.
OK or NG
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: Approximately 0.2 - 5.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
SEC918C
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".

IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR EC

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition
coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high C
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
• Fuel injector (1)
D
E
PBIA9870J

IGNITION SIGNAL
BBWA2701E
CAUTION:

IGNITION SIGNAL
Termi- Wire A
nal No. Color
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V EC
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE C
• More than a few seconds after turning igni-
(11 - 14 V )
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V) D

IGNITION SIGNAL
BBWA2702E
CAUTION:

IGNITION SIGNAL
Termi- Wire A
nal No. Color
0 - 0.3 V
[Engine is running] EC
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm C
at idle
21 G Ignition signal No. 4 D

0.2 - 0.5 V
[Engine is running]
E
PBIA9266J
F

G
1.CHECK ENGINE START

H
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
I
Yes (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 4.
J
With CONSULT-III
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. K
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
M
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 17, 18, 21, 22
and ground with an oscilloscope. N
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
NOTE: O
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
PBIA9567J
PBIA9265J
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
IGNITION SIGNAL
4.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-246.
PBIA9575J
5.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

2. Disconnect condenser (1) harness connector.
PBIB3329E
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
6.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 3 and condenser terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-246.
NG >> GO TO 7.
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser

IGNITION SIGNAL
8.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
EC

C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
9.CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-498, "Component Inspection". E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser. F
10.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
- Fuel injector (1)
PBIA9870J
K
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. M
NG >> GO TO 11.
N
PBIB0138E

O
• Harness connector F8
• Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F8
P
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
12.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.

IGNITION SIGNAL

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 17, 18, 21, 22 and ignition coil terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
Refer to EC-245.
>> INSPECTION END

IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

CAUTION:
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.

1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞ Ω
1 and 3
Except 0 Ω
2 and 3
4. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor.
PBIB0847E

IGNITION SIGNAL
sure. A
NOTE:
sure applies again during the following procedure.
EC
- : Vehicle front
8. Start engine.
pressure. C
cal discharge from the ignition coils. D
15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm (0.52 - E
16. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is F
tion.
Spark should be generated. G
CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil H

• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is taken. I
NOTE:
functioning. J
17. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor.
CONDENSER
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
L
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
4. If NG, replace condenser.
M
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006029735 O
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR


The refrigerant pressure sensor (1) is installed at the condenser of

the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
• : Vehicle front
BBIA0713E
PBIB2657E

EC
BBWA2705E
P
CAUTION:

Termi- Wire
nal No. Color
[Engine is running]
41 GR Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0 V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
48 BR • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
74 W [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

SULT-III or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0 V

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9574J

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body.
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor (1) harness connector.
- : Vehicle front A
EC
BBIA0713E
D
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3
and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. F
NG >> GO TO 4.
G
SEF479Y

I
5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT J
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 48. K
Continuity should exist. L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. M
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART N
O
7.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT P

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
Refer to EC-245.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.

Refer to ATC-117, "Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" (ATC) or MTC-85, "Removal and
Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" (MTC).

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
A
EC
P
ABBWA0384GB

ABBWA0385GB

A
Fuel Pressure INFOID:0000000006029741
EC
Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000006029742

C
A/T No load* (in P or N position)

Target idle speed 700 ± 50 rpm
M/T No load* (in Neutral position) D
Air conditioner: ON 850 rpm or more
E
Ignition timing 13 ± 5° BTDC
*: Under the following conditions: F
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position G
Calculated Load Value INFOID:0000000006029743
H
Condition Calculated load value (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
At idle 10 - 35 %
I
At 2,500 rpm 10 - 35 %
Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000006029744
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14 V)

Output voltage at idle 0.8 - 1.1* V K
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load. L
Intake Air Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000006029745
M
Temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
N
80 (176) 0.283 - 0.359
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000006029746
Temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 P
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater INFOID:0000000006029747
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.4 - 4.4 Ω

Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater INFOID:0000000006029748
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.4 - 4.4 Ω
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) INFOID:0000000006029749

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) INFOID:0000000006029750

Throttle Control Motor INFOID:0000000006029751
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15 Ω
Fuel Injector INFOID:0000000006029752
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.1 - 14.5 Ω
Fuel Pump INFOID:0000000006029753
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 0.2 - 5.0 Ω

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MR18DE (FFV)]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000006029754
EC
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JMBIA0078GB
DETAILED FLOW


the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “Diagnostic Work Sheet”. (Refer to EC-511, "Diagnostic Work
Sheet".)
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data. (Print them out with CONSULT-III .)
- Erase DTC. (Refer to EC-585, "Diagnosis Description".)
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
(Symptom Table is useful. Refer to EC-924, "Symptom Table".)
Is any symptom described and is any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
Also study the normal operation and fail safe related to the symptom. Refer to EC-928, "Description" and EC-
910, "Fail Safe".
Diagnosis Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident.
>> GO TO 5.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail safe related to the symptom. Refer to EC-928, "Description" and EC-
910, "Fail Safe".
Diagnosis Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident.
>> GO TO 6.
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the displayed DTC, and then make sure that DTC is
detected again.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to EC-912, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check according to EC-913, "DTC Index".
Perform EC-513, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 9. A
7.PERFORM SPEC IN DATA MONITOR MODE
With CONSULT-III EC
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL” and “A/F ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value using CON-
SULT-III in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode. Refer to EC-606, "Component Function Check".
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
C
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE D
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-585, "Diagnosis Description".
YES >> GO TO 11. E
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE
F
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-924, "Symptom Table" based on the confirmed symptom in
step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
G
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system. H
NOTE:
The Diagnosis Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnosis Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI- I
16, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
YES >> GO TO 11. J
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check the voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-III. Refer to EC-899, "Reference Value".
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART K
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment. L
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. Refer to EC-913, "DTC Index".
>> GO TO 12. M
12.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE or Component Function N
Check again, and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
O
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 10.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 6.
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC in ECM and P
TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-585, "Diagnosis Description".)
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000006029755
DESCRIPTION

engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
tomer complaint.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
• Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
• Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
WORKSHEET SAMPLE
MTBL0017

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A
BASIC INSPECTION
BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000006029756
EC
1.INSPECTION START
scheduled maintenance. C
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut D
- Air cleaner clogging E
- Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
- Air conditioner switch is OFF. F
- Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
SEF983U
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature G
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
H
SEF976U J

load. K
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or ECM
[Diagnostic Test Mode II (self-diagnostic results)].
Is any DTC detected?
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
M
SEF977U
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE N
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
O
>> GO TO 3
3.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. P

load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
For procedure, refer to EC-516, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair
Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-937, "Idle Speed".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 4.
PBIA8513J

Perform EC-518, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 5.
For procedure, refer to "IDLE SPEED" EC-516, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement".
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 6.
Check the Following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-758, "DTC Logic".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-753, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace. Then GO TO 4.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-516,
"ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 4.
For procedure, refer to EC-516, "IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair
Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-937, "Ignition Timing".
1 : Timing indicator
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 9.
PBIB3263E

Perform EC-518, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".

>> GO TO 10. A
For procedure, refer to EC-516, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement".
C
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 13.
D
11.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. E
For procedure, refer to EC-516, "IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair
Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-937, "Ignition Timing".
F
G
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 12.
PBIB3263E H
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-187, "Removal and Installation".
I
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Repair the timing chain installation. Then GO TO 4. J
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-758, "DTC Logic". K
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-753, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 14. L
NO >> Repair or replace. Then GO TO 4.
M
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer toEC-516,
"ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement". N
>> GO TO 4.
O
15.INSPECTION END
If ECM is replaced during this BASIC INSPECTION procedure, go to EC-516, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE
WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement". P
>> INSPECTION END

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000006029757
When replacing ECM, this procedure must be performed.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-
quirement INFOID:0000000006029758
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION OF NATS SYSTEM AND REGISTRATION OF ALL NATS IGNITION KEY IDS
Refer to EC-516, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Require-
ment".
>> GO TO 2.
Refer to EC-518, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE
Refer to EC-519, "WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE : Special Repair Requirement".
>> END
IDLE SPEED
IDLE SPEED : Description INFOID:0000000006029759
This describes how to check the idle speed. For the actual procedure, follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000006029760
1.CHECK IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-III
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Without CONSULT-III
Check idle speed by installing the pulse type tachometer clamp on suitable high-tension wire which installed
between No.4 ignition coil and No.4 Spark plug.
>> INSPECTION END

IGNITION TIMING
IGNITION TIMING : Description INFOID:0000000006029761
This describes how to check the ignition timing. For the actual procedure, follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000006029762

With CONSULT-III

1. Attach timing light to No. 1 ignition coil (1) wire as shown.
A
: Vehicle front
EC
PBIB3320E
D
2. Select "TARGET ING TIM HLD" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
3. Touch "START".
4. Check ignition timing. E
PBIB3263E H
Without CONSULT-III
1. Attach timing light to No. 1 ignition coil (1) wire as shown.
I
: Vehicle front
PBIB3320E
L
2. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Ignition timing hold). Refer to EC-585, "Diagnosis Description".
M
N
>> INSPECTION END
PBIB3263E
P
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000006029763
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the fully closed position of the throttle
valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time electric throttle
control actuator or ECM is replaced.

THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000006029764
1.PRECONDITIONING
Make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.Learning will be cancelled if any of the following con-
ditions are missed for even a moment.
NOTE:
If the throttle valve does not operate correctly (ex. frozen valve on housing), the learning may not be done suc-
cessfully.
• Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 MPH)
• Battery voltage: More than 10 V (Ignition switch ON and engine stopped)
• Engine coolant temperature: -20 - 100°C
• Intake air temperature: More than -20°C
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “CLSD THL POS LEARN“ in “WORK SUPPORT“ mode.
3. Touch “START“ and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Make sure that “CMPLT“ is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 10 seconds.Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 sec-
onds by confirming the operating sound.
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC
1. Turn ignition switch and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC P1299 or P2109 detected?
YES-1 >> DTC P1299: Refer toEC-797, "Description"
YES-2 >> DTC P2109: Refer toEC-832, "Description"
>> END.
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR : Description INFOID:0000000006029765
This describes how to erase the mixture ratio self-learning value. For the actual procedure, follow the instruc-
tions in “Diagnosis Procedure”.
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000006029766
1.START
With CONSULT-III
3. Clear mixture ratio self-learning value by touching “CLEAR”.
Without CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-913, "DTC Index",

A
>> END
WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE
EC
WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE : Description INFOID:0000000006029767
When replacing ECM or fuel composition is drastically changed, engine is difficult to start due to a discrepancy C
between fuel learning value in ECM and fuel composition in fuel tank. In this case, fuel learning value that is
closer to fuel composition is forcibly written to ECM, and engine start ability can be improved.
Perform "WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE" when ECM is replaced or engine is difficult to start.
D
WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000006029768
1.CHECK FUEL COMPOSITION E

1. Check ethanol density of fuel in fuel tank.
Is fuel composition checked?
YES >> GO TO 2. F
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE -I
G
2. Select "WRT FUEL LEARN VALUE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch "Start".
4. Select and touch from "E22", "E65" or "E100", whichever has the closest value to ethanol density of fuel in H
fuel tank, and then touch "UpDate".
5. Check that "ETHANOL DENS" value is displayed as shown in the following list according to set value.
I
SET VALUE E22 E65 E100
ETHANOL DENS 0.00 0.50 0.99
J
6. Start engine.
>> GO TO 6. K
3.PERFORM WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE -II
1. Touch "E22", and then touch "UpDate".
2. Check that an "ETHANOL DENS" value of 0.00 is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. L
3. Start engine.
Does engine start normally?
YES >> GO TO 6. M
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE -III N
2. Check that an "ETHANOL DENS" value of 0.50 is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
3. Start engine.
O
Does engine start normally?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
P
5.PERFORM WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE -IV
2. Check that an "ETHANOL DENS" value of 0.99 is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
3. Start engine.
>> GO TO 6.

6.CHECK HI SPEED FUEL LEARNING

1. Wait until engine becomes normal operating temperature.
2. Select "HI SPD FUEL LEARN" in "DATA MONITOR" with CONSULT-III.
4. Check the indication of "HI SPD FUEL LEARN".
Which is displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
ON >> GO TO 7.
OFF >> INSPECTION END
7.CHECK HI SPEED FUEL LEARNING
1. Let engine idle until "ON" of "HI SPD FUEL LEARN" changes to "OFF".
NOTE:
It will take at most 30 minutes until "ON" of "HI SPD FUEL LEARN" changes to "OFF".
>> INSPECTION END

< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [MR18DE (FFV)]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000006029769
EC
JPBIA3000GB

ECM performs various controls such as fuel injection control and ignition timing control.
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000006029771
ALBIA0618ZZ
1. Sub fuel control solenoid valve 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor
valve
7. Engine coolant temperature sensor 8. Sub fuel pump relay 9. IPDM E/R
10. ECM 11. Mass air flow sensor 12. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(with intake temperature sensor)
13. Electric throttle control actuator 14. EVAP canister purge volume control 15. Ignition coil
(with built in throttle position sensor solenoid valve (with power transistor) and spark
and throttle control motor) plug
16. Sub fuel pump

EC
L
BBIA0724E
1. Mass air flow sensor 2. Engine coolant temperature sensor 3. Electric throttle control actuator M
: Vehicle front N

BBIA0735E

harness connector
(view with inspection hole cover re-
moved)
: Vehicle front

EC
L
BBIA0733E
1. HO2S1 2. Three way catalyst (Manifold) 3. HO2S2 M

7. HO2S2 harness connector
: Vehicle front N

ALBIA0619ZZ
solenoid valve
(view with engine cover removed)

7. Sub fuel pump 8. Sub fuel control solenoid valve 9. Sub fuel pump relay
(view with engine cover removed) (view with fuse and fusible link box A
cover removed)
: Vehicle front
EC
ALBIA0273ZZ
J
1. ASCD steering switch 2. MAIN switch 3. CANCEL switch
4. SET/COAST switch 5. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch 6. ASCD brake switch
7. Stop lamp switch 8. ASCD clutch switch 9. Clutch pedal
K
L
Component Reference
Accelerator pedal position sensor EC-835, "Description"
ASCD brake switch EC-804, "Description" M
ASCD steering switch EC-800, "Description"
ASCD vehicle speed sensor EC-813, "Description"
N
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) EC-758, "Description"
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC-753, "Description"
Cooling fan motor EC-562, "System Description" O
Electric throttle control actuator EC-833, "Description"
Engine coolant temperature sensor EC-658, "Description"
P
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-776, "Description"
Fuel injector EC-724, "Description"
Fuel pump EC-881, "Description"
Heated oxygen sensor 1 EC-669, "Description"
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater EC-634, "Description"

Component Reference
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater EC-638, "Description"
Ignition signal EC-724, "Description"
Intake air temperature sensor EC-654, "Description"
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC-578, "System Description"
Knock sensor EC-750, "Description"
Mass air flow sensor EC-642, "Description"
PCV valve EC-890, "Description"
Refrigerant pressure sensor EC-891, "Description"
Stop lamp switch EC-820, "Description"
Sub fuel control solenoid valve EC-856, "Description"
Sub fuel pump EC-895, "Description"
Sub fuel pump relay EC-860, "Description"
Throttle control motor EC-662, "Description"
Throttle control motor relay EC-824, "Description"
Throttle position sensor EC-662, "Description"
Vehicle speed sensor EC-783, "Description"

MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
A
EC
JPBIA3001GB
I
J

K
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air L
Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature
M
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Fuel injection
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position N
& mixture ratio Fuel injector
Park/neutral position (PNP) signal Gear position control
O
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
EPS control unit*2 Power steering operation P
Combination meter*2 Vehicle speed & Fuel level

2 Air conditioner operation
BCM*
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
• During warm-up
• Hot-engine operation
<Fuel decrease>
• During deceleration
• During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
PBIB2953E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about
heated oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-669, "Description". This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of
stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of heated oxygen sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
• Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
- Deceleration and acceleration
- High-load, high-speed operation
- Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit
- Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1
- High engine coolant temperature
- During warm-up
- When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. A
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared
to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an
EC
increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment. C
The ECM also presumes the ethanol mixture ratio using the feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor1
during the vehicle is driving. Then the ECM controls the amount of fuel injected according to the presumed
ethanol mixture ratio. D
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
G
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.

• Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System H
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
• Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals I
of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used the fail-safe system is operating. J
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds. K
FFV COLD START CONTROL
When engine start cold, ECM activates sub fuel pump and controls open or close control of sub fuel control
solenoid value according to ethanol density and engine coolant temperature, so that fuel (E22) in sub tank is L
supplied to engine and cold start ability is improved.
ECM activates sub fuel pump in the following conditions.
×: Active —: Inactive M
Engine coolant temperature [°C (°F)]
Ethanol density index
-5.3 (22) or less Between -5.3 (22) and 18 (64) More than 18 (64)
Less than 0.50 — — —
N
0.50 or more and less than 0.70 × — —
0.70 or more × × —
O

ALBIA0618ZZ
valve
16. Sub fuel pump

EC
L
BBIA0724E
: Vehicle front N

BBIA0735E

harness connector
moved)
: Vehicle front

EC
L
BBIA0733E

: Vehicle front N

ALBIA0619ZZ
solenoid valve

cover removed)
: Vehicle front
EC
ALBIA0273ZZ
J
K
L
Component Reference
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) EC-758, "Description" M
N
Fuel injector EC-724, "Description"
Heated oxygen sensor 2 EC-701, "Description" O
Intake air temperature sensor EC-654, "Description"
P
Mass air flow sensor EC-642, "Description"
Park/neutral position switch EC-815, "Description"
Sub fuel control solenoid valve EC-856, "Description"
Sub fuel pump EC-895, "Description"
Sub fuel pump relay EC-860, "Description"

Component Reference

ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM
A
EC
JPBIA3002GB
G
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART H

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) I
Engine speed*2
J
Ignition timing Ignition coil (with power transis-
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control tor) K
L
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Combination meter*1 Vehicle speed

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. M
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION N
Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig- O
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM. P
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle
• At low battery voltage
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not

operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
ALBIA0618ZZ
valve
16. Sub fuel pump

EC
L
BBIA0724E
: Vehicle front N

BBIA0735E

harness connector
moved)
: Vehicle front

EC
L
BBIA0733E

: Vehicle front N

ALBIA0619ZZ
solenoid valve

cover removed)
: Vehicle front
EC
ALBIA0273ZZ
J
K
L
Component Reference
N
Ignition signal EC-764, "Description"
Mass air flow sensor EC-642, "Description" O
Park/neutral position switch EC-815, "Description"
P

JMBIA0449GB


Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position IPDM E/R
↓
Battery Battery voltage*2 Air conditioner
Air conditioner relay
cut control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ↓
Compressor
EPS control unit*1 Power steering operation
Combination meter*1 Vehicle speed
BCM*1 Air conditioner ON signal
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low.

• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
A
EC
ALBIA0618ZZ
1. Sub fuel control solenoid valve 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor N
valve
7. Engine coolant temperature sensor 8. Sub fuel pump relay 9. IPDM E/R O
13. Electric throttle control actuator 14. EVAP canister purge volume control 15. Ignition coil P
16. Sub fuel pump

BBIA0724E
: Vehicle front

EC
L
BBIA0735E
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Knock sensor 3. IPDM E/R M

harness connector
N
moved)
O
: Vehicle front

BBIA0733E

: Vehicle front

EC
ALBIA0619ZZ
P
solenoid valve

(view with engine cover removed) (view with fuse and fusible link box
cover removed)
: Vehicle front
ALBIA0273ZZ

Component Reference

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
A
EC
JPBIA3003GB
G
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART H

ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation I
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch (M/T models) Clutch pedal operation
J
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation ASCD vehicle speed control
actuator
Combination meter* Vehicle speed K
TCM* (A/T models) Powertrain revolution
*: This signal is sent to via the ECM through CAN communication line
L
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed M
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE lamp and SET lamp in combination meter. If any malfunc- N
tion occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. O
SET OPERATION
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE lamp in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 P
MPH). press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET lamp in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until
the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION

When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
• CANCEL switch is pressed
• More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
• Brake pedal is depressed
• Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to neutral position. (M/T models)
• Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position (A/T models)
• Vehicle speed decreased to 12 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
• Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
• Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch
is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
• Brake pedal is released
• Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
• Selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T models)
• Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).

EC
ALBIA0618ZZ
M
valve N
10. ECM 11. Mass air flow sensor 12. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) O
and throttle control motor) plug P
16. Sub fuel pump

BBIA0724E
: Vehicle front

EC
L
BBIA0735E

harness connector
N
moved)
O
: Vehicle front

BBIA0733E

: Vehicle front

EC
ALBIA0619ZZ
P
solenoid valve

cover removed)
: Vehicle front
ALBIA0273ZZ

Component Reference
ASCD steering switch EC-800, "Description"
ASCD clutch switch EC-804, "Description"
ASCD brake switch EC-804, "Description"
Stop lamp switch EC-820, "Description"
Electric throttle control actuator EC-833, "Description"
ASCD indicator EC-870, "Description"

CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
A
Refer to LAN-26, "CAN Communication Signal Chart", about CAN communication for detail.
D

COOLING FAN CONTROL
COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA0177GB

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature IPDM E/R

↓
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure Cooling fan
Cooling fan relay
control
Battery Battery voltage*1 ↓
Cooling fan motor
Combination meter Vehicle speed*2
BCM Air conditioner ON signal*2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM controls cooling fan speed corresponding to vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pres-
sure, air conditioner ON signal. Then control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].

COOLING FAN CONTROL
A
EC
PBIB2852E F
The ECM controls cooling fan relays through CAN communication line.
G
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
1 2 3
H
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF OFF
High (HIGH) ON ON ON I

COOLING FAN CONTROL
ALBIA0618ZZ
valve
16. Sub fuel pump

COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
L
BBIA0724E
: Vehicle front N

COOLING FAN CONTROL
BBIA0735E

harness connector
moved)
: Vehicle front

COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
L
BBIA0733E

: Vehicle front N

COOLING FAN CONTROL
ALBIA0619ZZ
solenoid valve

COOLING FAN CONTROL
cover removed)
: Vehicle front
EC
ALBIA0273ZZ
J
K
L
Component Reference
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC-753, "Description" M
Cooling fan motor EC-562, "System Description"
N

PBIB3039E
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
PBIB3345E

1. EVAP canister purge volume control 2. Intake manifold collector 3. EVAP purge resonator A
solenoid valve
: From next figure
NOTE: EC
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.
J
BBIA0935E
1. EVAP canister
: Vehicle front : To previous figure K
L
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator M

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air N

Battery Battery voltage*1 EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
purge flow control ume control solenoid valve O
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas P
2 Vehicle speed
Combination meter*
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating.
ALBIA0618ZZ
valve

(with built in throttle position sensor solenoid valve (with power transistor) and spark A
16. Sub fuel pump
EC
BBIA0724E
N
7. Refrigerant pressure sensor O
: Vehicle front

BBIA0735E

harness connector
moved)
: Vehicle front

EC
L
BBIA0733E

: Vehicle front N

ALBIA0619ZZ
solenoid valve

cover removed)
: Vehicle front
EC
ALBIA0273ZZ
J
K
L
Component Reference
N
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-776, "Description"
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 EC-669, "Description"
Mass air flow sensor EC-642, "Description" O
P

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
PBIB3333E

Engine speed and piston position Intake valve Intake valve timing control
timing control solenoid valve
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
valve.
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing (IVT) control sole-
noid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake
valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.

EC
ALBIA0618ZZ
M
valve N
10. ECM 11. Mass air flow sensor 12. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) O
and throttle control motor) plug P
16. Sub fuel pump

BBIA0724E
: Vehicle front

EC
L
BBIA0735E

harness connector
N
moved)
O
: Vehicle front

BBIA0733E

: Vehicle front

EC
ALBIA0619ZZ
P
solenoid valve

cover removed)
: Vehicle front
ALBIA0273ZZ

Component Reference
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC-578, "System Description"

A
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000006401734
INTRODUCTION EC
C
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5 D
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
E
1st Trip Freeze Frame data —
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5 F
Permanent Diagnostic Trouble Code (Permanent DTC) *
Service $0A of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
*: Service $0A is not applied for regions where it is not mandated.
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. G
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value
data Frame data H
CONSULT-III × × × × × —
GST × × × — × ×
I
ECM × ×* — — — —
The malfunction indicator (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in J
two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-910,
"Fail Safe".)
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC K
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in L
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. M
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC

N
1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
up up ing
O
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst P
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
One trip detection diagnoses (Re-
— × — — × — — —
fer to EC-913, "DTC Index".)
Except above — — — × — × × —
DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA

DTC and 1st Trip DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to “EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR-
MATION ITEMS”. These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/compo-
nent. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-III.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without light-
ing up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not
prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-509, "Work Flow". Then perform DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE or Component Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is
duplicated, the item requires repair.
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST.
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
With CONSULT-III
With GST
CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc.

These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6.
(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) A
No Tools
Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc. EC
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor- C
mal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if
available) is recommended.
DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-III. D
E
How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC
With CONSULT-III
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “All Erase” in the “Descrip-
F
tion” of “FINAL CHECK” mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST.
NOTE: G
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-913, "DTC Index"), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. H
2. Perform AT-39, "OBD-II Function for A/T System". (The DTC in TCM will be erased)
3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE: I
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-913, "DTC Index"), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. J
2. Perform AT-39, "OBD-II Function for A/T System". (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal.
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
K
hours.
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes L
- Freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes M
- Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
N
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com- O
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. P
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:

The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item Performance Corresponding

Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
(CONSULT-III indication) Priority* DTC No.
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420
HO2S 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1133
HO2S HTR 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater P0135
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE), one by one based on the
priority for models with CONSULT-III.
SRT Set Timing

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL ON)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.

—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will A
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi- EC
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state C
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
• The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
D
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
• When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. E
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. F
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page. G

SEF573XB
*1 “How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC” *2 “How to Display SRT Status” *3 “How to Set SRT Code”
How to Display SRT Code

WITH CONSULT-III
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose
SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP(MIL)
Description

The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with- A
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, check MIL circuit. Refer to EC-886,
"Component Function Check". EC
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go OFF.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
C
SAT652J
D
On Board Diagnostic System Function
The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. E

Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.). F
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped
G
H
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is de-
WARNING tected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip de-
tection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a I
malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
• Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) J
• One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS K
Engine stopped L
M
Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or rich),
MONITOR monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read.
N
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check

In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check MIL circuit. Refer to O
EC-886, "Component Function Check".
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning
P
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Self-diagnostic Results

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MI
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.
PBIA3905E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-913, "DTC Index".)
HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to
“HOW to ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)”.
• If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
• Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor
In this mode, the MIL displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated
oxygen sensor 1.
MIL Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.
To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until
engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load conditions. Then make sure that the
MIL comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no load.
MIL FLASHING WITHOUT DTC
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag-
nostic test mode. How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are
described later. Refer to “How to Switch Diagnostic Test Mode”.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Freeze frame data A
• Test values
EC
How to Switch Diagnostic Test Mode
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. C
a malfunction.
• Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
HOW to SET DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS) D
E
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
F
blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE: G
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
J
PBIB0092E
HOW to SET DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR)

1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). K
Refer to “HOW to SET DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)”.
2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). L
HOW to ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to “HOW to SET DIAGNOSTIC TEST
MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)”.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds. M
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
OBD System Operation Chart N
Relationship Between MIL, 1st Trip DTC, DTC and Detectable Items
• When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory. O
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come ON.
• The MIL will go OFF after the vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is counted P
only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while
counting, the counter will reset.
• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) without the
same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection
System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) without
the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-III will
count the number of times the vehicle is driven.

• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
Summary Chart
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other

MIL (goes OFF) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see “EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”.
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see “EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
Relationship Between MIL, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”,
“Fuel Injection System”

EC
L
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will go OFF after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is de- M
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
stored in ECM.
N
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM. O
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de- *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when ve-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip hicle is driven once (pattern C) with- P
freeze frame data will be cleared. out the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
Explanation for Driving Patterns for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”, “Fuel Injection System”
<Driving Pattern B>

• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
• The MIL will go OFF when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to
70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
• The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
• The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is
stored in ECM.
Relationship Between MIL, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns Except For “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deteriora-
tion>”, “Fuel Injection System”

EC
L
SEF393SD
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will go OFF after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is de- M
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
stored in ECM.
N
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi-
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the cle is driven once (pattern B) without
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM. O
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip P
freeze frame data will be cleared.
Explanation for Driving Patterns Except for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”, “Fuel Injection System”

<Driving Pattern A>
AEC574
• The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
• The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
• The MIL will go OFF when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
CONSULT-III Function INFOID:0000000006401735
FUNCTION

Work support
Self-diagnostic results
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Active test
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
ECU part number ECM part number can be read.
• Test values
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item

Work item Condition Usage A

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE • Fuel pump will stop by Touching “START” during idling. When releasing fuel pressure from
Crank a few times after engine stalls. fuel line
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • Idle condition When setting target idle speed EC
SELF-LEARNING CONT* • The coefficient of self-learning control mixture ratio returns
to the original coefficient.
NOTE: C
Fuel learning value is related to ethanol density. When this
item is used, it is necessary to perform "WRITE FUEL
LEARNING VALUE" because "ETHANOL DENS" is
changed to 0.50. D
Refer to EC-519, "WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE : Spe-
cial Repair Requirement"
AP POS LEARN CLR* — — E
Ignition timing will be hold to check ignition timing with timing
TARGET IGN TIM HLD When checking ignition timing
light.
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • Idle condition When adjusting target ignition tim- F
ing
CLSD THL POS LEARN • Ignition switch ON When learning the throttle valve
closed position
G
WRT FUEL LEARN VALUE • Ignition switch ON When ECM is replaced.
• Engine stopped When engine start is difficult.
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure. H
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
I
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-913, "DTC Index".)
J
Freeze frame data
Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
• The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to K
CODE
EC-913, "DTC Index".)
[PXXXX]
• One mode in the following is displayed. L
FUEL SYS-B1
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
M
• Always a certain value is displayed.

CAL/LD VALUE [%]
• This item is not efficient for C11 models.
N
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
or [°F]
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than O
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel sched- P
ule.
VEHICL SPEED
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
• Always a certain value is displayed.
ABSOL TH·P/S [%]
• This item is not efficient for C11 models.

Freeze frame data
Description
item*
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
or [°F]
FUEL SYS-B2
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • Always a certain value is displayed.
• These items are not efficient for C11 models.
INT MANI PRES [kPa]
COMBUST CONDI-
TION
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
×: Applicable
• Accuracy becomes poor if engine
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the speed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED rpm signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) • If the signal is interrupted while the
and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
• The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is value is indicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1 V
displayed. • When engine is running specification
• “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection
• When engine is running specification
B/FUEL SCHDL msec pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any
learned on board correction.
value is indicated.
• The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback cor- • When engine is running specification
A/F ALPHA-B1 %
rection factor per cycle is indicated. range is indicated in “SPEC”.
• This data also includes the data for
• When the engine coolant temperature
• The engine coolant temperature (determined by sensor is open or short-circuited,
COOLAN TEMP/S °C or °F the signal voltage of the engine coolant tempera- ECM enters fail-safe mode. The en-
ture sensor) is displayed. gine coolant temperature determined
by the ECM is displayed.
HO2S1 (B1) V
is displayed.
HO2S2 (B1) V
is displayed.
• Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal • After turning ON the ignition switch,
during air-flow ratio feedback control: "RICH" is displayed until air-fuel mix-
RICH: means the mixture became "rich", and ture ratio feedback control begins.
HO2S1 MNTR(B1) RICH/LEAN
control is being affected toward a leaner mixture. • When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
LEAN: means the mixture become "lean", and clamped, the value just before the
control is being affected toward a rich mixture. clamping is displayed continuously.
VHCL SPEED SE km/h or mph speed signal sent from combination meter is dis-
played.
BATTERY VOLT V • The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.

A
ACCEL SEN 1 • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
• The accelerator pedal position sensor signal volt-
ACCEL SEN 2 age is displayed.
TP SEN 1-B1 • TP SEN 2-B1 signal is converted by EC
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage is dis-
TP SEN 2-B1 played.
FUEL LEVEL SE V
• The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is dis- C
played.
• Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed • After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
START SIGNAL ON/OFF by the ECM according to the signals of engine played regardless of the starter sig- D
speed and battery voltage. nal.
• Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
CLSD THL POS ON/OFF ECM according to the accelerator pedal position
sensor signal. E
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condition-
AIR COND SIG ON/OFF er switch as determined by the air conditioner sig-
nal. F
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical
load signal.
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or G
LOAD SIGNAL ON/OFF
lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and light-
ing switch are OFF.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch H
IGNITION SW ON/OFF
signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan
HEATER FAN SW ON/OFF
switch signal. I
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp
BRAKE SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width J
INJ PULSE-B1 msec compensated by ECM according to the input sig-
computed value is indicated.
nals.
• Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume con- K
trol solenoid valve control value computed by the
PURG VOL C/V % ECM according to the input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value in-
creases. L
• Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advance an-
INT/V TIM (B1) °CA
gle.
• The control value of the intake valve timing con- M
trol solenoid valve (determined by ECM accord-
INT/V SOL-B1 ing to the input signals) is indicated.
%
• The advance angle becomes larger as the value
N
increases.
• The air conditioner relay control condition (deter-
AIR COND RLY ON/OFF mined by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated. O
• Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition
FUEL PUMP RLY ON/OFF determined by ECM according to the input sig-
nals. P
• Indicates the throttle control motor relay control
THRTL RELAY ON/OFF condition determined by the ECM according to
the input signals.

• Indicates the condition of the cooling fan (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input signals).
COOLING FAN HI/LOW/OFF HI: High speed operation
OFF: Stop
the input signals.
the input signals.
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the
I/P PULLY SPD rpm
turbine revolution sensor signal.
VEHICLE SPEED km/h or mph speed signal sent from TCM or combination
meter is displayed.
SET VHCL SPD km/h or mph • The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neu-
P/N POSI SW ON/OFF
tral position (PNP) signal.
• The intake air temperature (determined by the
INT/A TEMP SE °C or °F signal voltage of the intake air temperature sen-
sor) is indicated.
• The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure
AC PRESS SEN V
sensor is displayed.
• Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM • When the engine is stopped, a certain
IGN TIMING BTDC
according to the input signals. value is indicated.
• The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback value is indicated.
A/F LEARN-B1 %
learning factor per cycle is indicated. • This data also includes the data for
• Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control value
computed by ECM according to the input signals.
O2 SEN HTR DTY %
• The current flow to the heater becomes larger as
the value increases.
ALCOHOL MIX — • Indicates alcohol mixture volume of engine oil.
• Indicates ethanol density of fuel that is estimated
ETHANOL DENS —
from fuel learning value.
• Calculates fuel sensor signal from combination
FUEL LEVEL L
meter and indicates remaining fuel level.
• Indicates signal voltage of heated oxygen sensor
HO2S1 HTR VOLT mV
1.
• Indicates accumulation value of ethanol con-
ETHANOL CONS L
sumption.
ESTM ENG OIL
°C or °F • Indicates estimated engine oil temperature.
TEMP
• Indicates status of sub fuel control solenoid value
SUB FP STATUS ON/OFF and sub fuel pump relay that is decided by ECM,
according to input signal.
HI SPD FUEL
ON/OFF • Indicates status of high speed fuel learning.
LEARN
REFUEL JDG ON/OFF • Indicates status of refuel judgement.
• Indicates evaporation status of alcohol mixture of
ALCOHOL EVA STA ON/OFF
engine oil.

A
Voltage —
Frequency msec, Hz or % • Only "#" is displayed if item is unable
to be measured.
DUTY-HI • Voltage. frequency, duty cycle or pulse width • Figures with "#"s are temporary ones. EC
DUTY-LOW measured by the probe. They are the some figures as an actu-
— al place of data which was just previ-
PLS WIDTH-HI ously measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW C
NOTE:
D
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
E
Test item Condition Judgement Check Item (Remedy)
trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see F
FUEL INJECTION • Fuel injector
• Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
• Engine: After warming up, run en- G
gine at 1,500 rpm.
• Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according • Harness and connectors
PURG VOL CONT/V
volume control solenoid valve to the opening percent. • Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON- H
SULT-III.
stopped) I
Fuel pump relay makes the operat- • Harness and connectors
FUEL PUMP RELAY • Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
ing sound. • Fuel pump relay
J
COOLING FAN* • Turn the cooling fan “LOW”, “HI” Cooling fan moves and stops. • IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay)
and “OFF” CONSULT-III. • Cooling fan motor
• Engine: Return to the original K
V/T ASSIGN ANGLE • Intake valve timing control sole-
• Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM.
noid valve
CONSULT-III.
L
engine.
• Compression
• A/C switch OFF
• Fuel injector
POWER BALANCE • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral Engine runs rough or dies. M
• Power transistor
(M/T)
• Spark plug
• Cut off each fuel injector signal
• Ignition coil
one at a time using CONSULT-III.
N
trouble condition
If trouble symptom disappears, see
IGNITION TIMING • Timing light: Set
CHECK ITEM.
• Retard the ignition timing using O
CONSULT-III.

Test item Condition Judgement Check Item (Remedy)
Sub fuel control solenoid valve
• Engine coolant temperature is
makes the operating sound.
less than 90°C (194°F) • Harness and connectors
SUB FUEL CONT NOTICE:
• Turn the sub fuel control solenoid • Fuel injector
SOL/V Sub fuel control solenoid valve au-
valve “ON” and “OFF” using • Sub fuel control solenoid valve
tomatically turns OFF after 6 sec-
CONSULT-III and listen to operat-
onds.
ing sound.
Sub fuel pump relay makes the op-
• Engine coolant temperature is
erating sound. • Harness and connectors
SUB FUEL PUMP less than 90°C (194°F)
NOTICE: • Fuel injector
RELAY • Turn the sub fuel pump relay “ON”
Sub fuel pump relay automatically • Sub fuel pump relay
turns OFF after 1 second.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-585, "Diagnosis Description".
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode Test item Condition Reference page

HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-687
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 EC-695
HO2S1
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 —
Refer to corresponding
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 —
trouble diagnosis for DTC.
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-719
HO2S2 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 —
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 —
Diagnosis Tool Function INFOID:0000000006401736
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978/ISO
15031-4 has several functions explained below.
ISO 15765-4 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual.
SEF139P
FUNCTION
Diagnostic Service Function

This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including an-
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
alog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA)
ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-913, "DTC Index".

Diagnostic Service Function
A
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were stored by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This in-
cludes: EC
• Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
• Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
• Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
• Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
C
• Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
• Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of D
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal E
driving conditions.
Service $08 — This diagnostic service is not applicable on this vehicle.
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)

This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor- F
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
Service $0A* PERMANENT DTCs This diagnostic service gains access to permanent DTCs which were stored by ECM.
*: Service $0A is not applied for regions where it is not mandated. G
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
2. Connect “GST” to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the hood opener han-
dle.
I
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual. J
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
L
SEF398S
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-

dure. M
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
N
SEF416S
P

< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [MR18DE (FFV)]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONI-
one or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
tion)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006401912
1.START
Make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
• Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
- A/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
• Electrical load: Not applied*
*: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM “SPEC” OF “DATA MONITOR” MODE
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-519, "WRITE FUEL LEARNING VALUE : Special Repair Requirement".
2. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR”
YES >> END
NO >> Go to EC-607, "Diagnosis Procedure".

A
OVERALL SEQUENCE
EC
P
PBIB2384E

PBIB3213E
DETAILED PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-606, "Component Function Check".
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is

NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is A
YES >> GO TO 17. EC
NO-1 >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 2.
NO-2 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 3.
2.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” C
SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? D
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> More than the SP value: GO TO 19.
3.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” E
SP value. F
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-1 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 6. G
1. Stop the engine. H
3. Start engine.
4. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within I
the SP value.
YES >> GO TO 5. J
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine. K
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving L
dition.
M
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE N
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-934, "Inspection".)
O
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO-1 >> Fuel pressure is too high: Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly” and then GO TO 8.
NO-2 >> Fuel pressure is too low: GO TO 7.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART P
Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging

YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly” and then GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace and then GO TO 8.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 9.
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 10.
1. Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-770, "Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)".)
2. Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-726, "Component Inspection".)
3. Intake air leakage
4. Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-213, "On-Vehicle Service".)
YES >> Replace fuel injector and then GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part and then GO TO 11.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
NO >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
Perform all DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE related with heated oxygen sensor 1.
• For DTC P0130, refer to EC-669, "DTC Logic".
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is
NO >> GO TO 15.
1. Stop the engine.
A
>> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” EC
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
C
NO >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-924, "Symptom Table". D
SP value. E
NO-1 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 18. F
G
- Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive H
- Noise from engine
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following. I
J

19.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM K
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element L
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 21.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.
20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” N
Is the measurement value within the SP value? O
NO >> “B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value: GO TO 21.
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR P
1. Stop the engine.

>> GO TO 22.


1. Start engine.
the SP value.
YES >> Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-642, "DTC
Logic". Then GO TO 29.
NO >> GO TO 23.
SP value.
YES >> GO TO 24.
NO >> More than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29.
24.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Go to EC-516, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Require-
ment".
>> GO TO 29.
YES >> GO TO 27.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.
SP value.
NO >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 27.
SP value.
YES >> GO TO 28.
NO >> Less than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30.
valve

A
>> GO TO 30.
29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” EC
indication is within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? C
NO >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-924, "Symptom Table".
30.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” D
Is the measurement value within the SP value? E
NO >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-924, "Symptom Table".
F

Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
STEP in Work Flow Situation
2 The CONSULT-III is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
1.INSPECTION START
>> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace.
Perform GI-16, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident", “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”.

A
EC
P
AABWA0181GB
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION-I

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection.
2.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connectors.
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F48 5
118
119 Ground Existed
E58
120
121
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.

4.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Reconnect ECM harness connectors.
3. Check the voltage between ECM connector terminals.
ECM
(+) (−) Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal
E58 93 121 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5. JMBIA2131ZZ

• 10 A fuse (No. 6)

A
ECM
(+) (–) Voltage
Connector EC
Terminal Terminal
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 8.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D

E
• 20 A fuse (No. 53)
• Harness for open or short between ECM and battery.
F
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
2. Check the voltage between ECM connector terminals as per the
following.
H
ECM
(+) (–) Voltage
Connector I
Terminal Terminal
After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
E58 115 121 voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V. J
Is the inspection result normal? JMBIA2132ZZ
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 11. K

1. Turn ignition switch ON. L
2. Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and
ground.
M
IPDM E/R
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E43 3 Ground Battery voltage N
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. O
PBIB2658E

P
>> INSPECTION END


ECM
(+) (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F48 20 E58 121 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 14.

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
F48 20 E43 7 Existed
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 13.
• Harness or connectors E8, F8
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VII
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
E58 115 E43 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.

cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even A
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
EC
• Clean as required to assure good contact.
• Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. C
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eye-
let make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. D
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-29, "Ground Distribution".
I
PBIB1870E

U1000, U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000006029813
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN com-
U1000 munication signal of OBD (emission related diagno-
sis) for 2 seconds or more. • Harness or connectors
CAN communication
(CAN communication line is open or
line When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN com- shorted)
U1001 munication signal other than OBD (emission related
diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> EC-621, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END

EC
AABWA0182GB
P
Go to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
When detecting error during the initial diagno-
U1010 CAN communication bus • ECM
sis of CAN controller of ECM.

YES >> Go to EC-622, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-III
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See EC-622, "DTC Logic".
Without CONSULT-III
2. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory.
Is the DTC U1010 displayed again?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
ment".
>> INSPECTION END

P0011 IVT CONTROL
P0011 IVT CONTROL
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC EC
Trouble diagnosis
name C
• Intake valve control solenoid valve D
Intake valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
P0011
control performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
• Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for in- E

1.PRECONDITIONING F
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. G
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I H
With CONSULT-III
I
3. Let it idle for 1 minute.
J
K
5. Repeat the following procedure more than 6 times.
-Slightly depressed the accelerator pedal for 5 seconds. L
-Fully released the accelerator pedal for 5 seconds.
6. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds.
M
YES >> Go to EC-624, "Diagnosis Procedure"
NO >> GO TO 3.
N
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds. O

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (221°F) P
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
CAUTION:

P0011 IVT CONTROL
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP

1. Start engine.
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
Is oil pressure warning lamp illuminated?
YES >> Go to LU-17, "Inspection".
NO >> GO TO 2.
PBIA8559J

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
PBIA9557J

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
YES >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-187, "Removal and Installation".

P0011 IVT CONTROL
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT A

Is the inspection result normal? EC
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Clean lubrication line.
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C
D
>> INSPECTION END
E
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. F
valve terminals as follows.
G
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω H
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIA9591J
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II J

1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Make sure that the K
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve L
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control M
JMBIA2107ZZ
JMBIA2110ZZ


P0030, P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
P0030, P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
OPERATION
Condition Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater

Ignition switch is turned ON
OFF
(engine stopped)
Engine is running ON
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- • Harness or connectors
Heated oxygen
sor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0030 sensor 1 heater
(An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM open.)
control circuit
Heated oxygen
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
control circuit low
Heated oxygen
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to shorted.)
control circuit high
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater.) • Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
4. Start engine and run engine at idle speed for at least 1minute under no load.

P0030, P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
Is 1st tip DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-627, "Diagnosis Procedure". A
EC
ABBWA0396GB
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

P0030, P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between HO2S1 harness connector and
ground.
HO2S1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F12 2 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9576J

• 10 A fuse (No. 54)
3. Check the continuity between HO2S1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity
F12 3 F48 39 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Refer to EC-629, "Component Inspection"
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0030, P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER

>> INSPECTION END EC

1.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER C

D
E
2 and 3 8 - 10 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist) F
NO >> GO TO 2. G
PBIA9577J
2.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 K

CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 L
Cleaner tool and approved anti-seize lubricant. M
>> INSPECTION END

N

P0036, P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
P0036, P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

For 2 minutes after starting engine OFF
After the following conditions are met.
ON
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
Heated oxygen
(An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM open.)
control circuit
Heated oxygen
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
control circuit low
Heated oxygen
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
control circuit high

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
P0036, P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
6. Check 1st trip DTC. A
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III” above.
Is 1st tip DTC detected? EC
C
ABBWA0390GB

P0036, P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER

YES >> GO TO 2.
ground.
HO2S2
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9576J

• 10 A fuse (No. 54)
• Harness connector E8, F8
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:

P0036, P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
>> INSPECTION END D

1.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER E

3. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows. F
2 and 3 3.3 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
G
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
H
NO >> GO TO 2. I
PBIA9577J
2.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 M

CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 N
O
>> INSPECTION END

P

P0053 HO2S1 HEATER
P0053 HO2S1 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed
OPERATION
Condition Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater

Ignition switch is turned ON
OFF
(engine stopped)
Engine is running ON
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
This diagnosis of the sensor heating checks the
Heated oxygen • Harness or connectors
internal resistance of the sensor.
sensor 1 heater (Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0053 If the sensor heating is defective, the internal re-
control circuit Plau- open)
sistance is considerably higher than it is at normal
sibility • Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
heating.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
4. Start engine and run engine at idle speed for at least 1minute under no load.

P0053 HO2S1 HEATER
EC
ABBWA0396GB
P

P0053 HO2S1 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 2.
ground.
HO2S1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9576J

• 10 A fuse (No. 54)
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 5.
Refer to EC-637, "Component Inspection"
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END


P0053 HO2S1 HEATER
>> INSPECTION END A
1.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER EC

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. C
Terminals Resistance D
2 and 3 8 - 10 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist) E

F
NO >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9577J
2.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 J

CAUTION:
K
Cleaner tool and approved anti-seize lubricant. L
>> INSPECTION END

M

P0054 HO2S2 HEATER
P0054 HO2S2 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

For 2 minutes after starting engine OFF
After the following conditions are met.
ON
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
This diagnosis of the sensor heating checks the
Heated oxygen internal resistance of the sensor.
(Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
P0054 sensor 2 heater If the sensor heating is defective, the internal re-
open)
control circuit sistance is considerably higher than it is at normal
• Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
heating.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III” above.

P0054 HO2S2 HEATER
A
EC
P
ABBWA0390GB


P0054 HO2S2 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 2.
ground.
HO2S2
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9576J

• 10 A fuse (No. 54)
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0054 HO2S2 HEATER

>> INSPECTION END EC

1.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER C

D
E
2 and 3 3.3 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist) F
NO >> GO TO 2. G
PBIA9577J

CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 L
>> INSPECTION END

N

P0101 MAF SENSOR
P0101 MAF SENSOR
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
PBIA9559J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
(The sensor circuit is open or
Mass air flow sensor cir- The sensor voltage is out of the range calculated shorted.)
P0101
cuit range/performance by the ECM. • Intake air leaks
• Intake air temperature sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

P0101 MAF SENSOR
EC
ABBWA0391GB
P

• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses

P0101 MAF SENSOR
• Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Reconnect the parts.
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between MAF sensor harness connector and
ground.
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1168E

3. Check the continuity between MAF sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
MAF sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 6.
MAF sensor ECM

Continuity

P0101 MAF SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 7. A
EC
Check intake air temperature sensor.
C
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
8.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR D
YES >> GO TO 9. E
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F
>> INSPECTION END G

1.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-I H
With CONSULT-III
5. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication. J
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1

K
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 V
MAS A/F SE-B1 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.8 - 1.1 V
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.8 - 1.1 V to Approx. 2.4 V* L
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals
as follows. N
ECM
O
(+) (−) Condition Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal
Ignition switch ON (En-
Approx. 0.4 V
P
gine stopped.)
73 51 Idle (Engine is warmed-
F48 (MAF sen- (Sensor up to normal operating 0.8 - 1.1 V JMBIA2135ZZ
sor signal) ground) temperature.)

0.8 - 1.1 V to
Idle to about 4,000 rpm
Approx. 2.4 V*

P0101 MAF SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR THE CAUSE OF UNEVEN AIR FLOW THROUGH MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
2. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication.

Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.8 - 1.1 V to Approx. 2.4 V*
Without CONSULT-III
as follows.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
Approx. 0.4 V
gine stopped.)

0.8 - 1.1 V to
Approx. 2.4 V*
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-III
With CONSULT-III

P0101 MAF SENSOR
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 A

EC
Without CONSULT-III C
4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals D
as follows.
E
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
F
Approx. 0.4 V
gine stopped.)
73 51 Idle (Engine is warmed- G

0.8 - 1.1 V to
Idle to about 4,000 rpm H
Approx. 2.4 V*
Is the inspection result normal? I
NO >> Clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
J

P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
PBIA9559J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0102
circuit low input to ECM. • Intake air leaks
Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0103 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
circuit high input sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
ABBWA0391GB
P
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected DTC.
Which DTC is detected?

P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Reconnect the parts.
YES >> GO TO 4.
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between MAF sensor harness connector and
ground.
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E

MAF sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 7.

MAF sensor ECM A

Continuity
EC
YES >> GO TO 8. C
D
YES >> GO TO 9. E
Refer to EC-614, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
>> INSPECTION END

G
1.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-I H

With CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. I
J

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 V K
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. L
Without CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. M
as follows. N
ECM
(+) (−) Condition Voltage O
Connector
Terminal Terminal
Approx. 0.4 V
gine stopped.) P

0.8 - 1.1 V to
Approx. 2.4 V*

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR THE CAUSE OF UNEVEN AIR FLOW THROUGH MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
2. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-II
With CONSULT-III

Without CONSULT-III
as follows.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
Approx. 0.4 V
gine stopped.)

0.8 - 1.1 V to
Approx. 2.4 V*
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-III
With CONSULT-III

Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 A

EC
Without CONSULT-III C
4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals D
as follows.
E
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
F
Approx. 0.4 V
gine stopped.)
73 51 Idle (Engine is warmed- G

0.8 - 1.1 V to
Idle to about 4,000 rpm H
Approx. 2.4 V*
NO >> Clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
J

P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>

[°C (°F)]
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminals 67
(Intake air temperature sensor) and 48 (Sensor ground).
SEF012P
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
Intake air tempera-
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0112 ture sensor circuit
sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
low input
Intake air tempera- • Intake air temperature sensor
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0113 ture sensor circuit
sent to ECM.
high input

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and run it for 5 minutes at idle speed.

EC
AABWA0189GB
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector and ground.
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F31 5 Ground Approx. 5 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. PBIB1169E
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between mass air flow sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
MAF sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.

3. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals as fol-
lows. A
Terminals Condition Resistance (kΩ

5 and 6 Intake air temperature °C (°F) 25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200 EC
C
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air tempera-
ture sensor).
JMBIA2136ZZ

P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
SEF594K
<Reference data>

[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and 56 (Sensor ground).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
Name
Engine coolant tem-
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0117 perature sensor cir-
sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
cuit low input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0118 perature sensor cir-
sent to ECM.
cuit high input

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
AABWA0190GB
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ECT sensor harness connector and
ground.
ECT sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. PBIB0080E
3.CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check the continuity between ECT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
ECT sensor ECM

Continuity
F6 2 F48 56 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.

terminals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure. A
Terminals Condition Resistance

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 kΩ EC
1 and 2 Temperature °C (°F) 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 kΩ
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 kΩ
C
YES >> INSPECTION END PBIB2005E
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. D

P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition,
these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle
valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the
current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the
ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve
opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors
P0122
2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
[Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) cir-
cuit is shorted.]
shorted.)
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
P0123
2 circuit high input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2)
(APP sensor 1)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
ABBWA0394GB
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
3. Check the voltage between electric throttle control actuator har-
ness connector and ground.

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3646E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con-
nector.
Electric throttle control actuator ECM

Continuity
F7 2 F48 34 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit.
ECM Sensor
Connector Terminal Name Connector Terminal
15 Refrigerant pressure sensor E17 3
F48 33 CMP sensor (PHASE) F21 1
34 TP sensor F7 2
E58 113 APP sensor E12 4
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Refer to EC-763, "Component Inspection".)
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning component.
6.CHECK APP SENSOR

YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 7. A
EC
2. Go to EC-839, "Special Repair Requirement".
>> INSPECTION END

C
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. D
nector.
E
Continuity
F7 4 F48 52 Existed F
G
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
nector.
I
Continuity
J
F7 3 F48 72 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR L
M
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.
11.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR N
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
O
>> INSPECTION END
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P
>> INSPECTION END


3. Perform EC-518, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
5. Set shift lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position.
under the following condition.
ECM
(+) (–) Condition Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal
More than
71 52 Fully released
0.36 V
(TP sensor (Sensor
1 signal) ground) Fully de- Less than
Accelerator pressed 4.75 V JMBIA2137ZZ
F48
pedal Less than
4.75 V
(TP sensor (Sensor
2 signal) ground) Fully de- More than
pressed 0.36 V
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000006029852

Refer to EC-518, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement"
>> END

P0125 ECT SENSOR
P0125 ECT SENSOR
A
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine EC

the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther- C
SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and 56 (Sensor ground).
I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC J

NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or
P0118. Refer to EC-658, "DTC Logic". K
• Harness or connectors L
Insufficient engine cool- • Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not
(High resistance in the circuit)
P0125 ant temperature for practical, even when some time has passed
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
closed loop fuel control after starting the engine.
• Thermostat
M
1.PRECONDITIONING N
O
>> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. P
2. Check 1st tip DTC.
YES >> EC-668, "Diagnosis Procedure"

P0125 ECT SENSOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-34, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END


3. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
terminals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure.
Terminals Condition Resistance

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 kΩ
1 and 2 Temperature °C (°F) 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 kΩ
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 kΩ
YES >> INSPECTION END PBIB2005E

P0130 HO2S1
P0130 HO2S1
A

V.
SEF327R E
SEF288D
I

not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately 0.4 -
0.5V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is K
within 400 - 500 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks
M
JMBIA0613ZZ
N
Heated oxygen sensor 1 The voltage from the sensor is constantly
P0130 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) O
circuit approx.0.4 - 0.5 V.

P
1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:

P0130 HO2S1
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
3. Start engine and run engine at idle speed for at least 30 minutes under no load.

P0130 HO2S1
EC
ABBWA0395GB
P

P0130 HO2S1
YES >> GO TO 2.
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 3.
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity
2. Check the continuity between HO2S1 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground.
HO2S1 ECM
Ground Continuity
F12 4 F48 65 Ground Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check connectors for water.

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:

P0130 HO2S1
>> INSPECTION END

EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
1.INSPECTION START
D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3. E
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. F
4. Start engine. G
CONSULT-III.
H
PBIB3458E
“HO2S1 (B1)” should be above 0.68 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. K
YES >> INSPECTION END L
NO >> GO TO 6.
3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1-I
M
Without CONSULT-III
3. Start engine. N
O
ECM
Con- (+) (–) Condition Voltage

nector
P
Terminal Terminal
The voltage should be
Revving up to above 0.68 V at least once
65 46
4,000 rpm under no during this procedure.
F48 (HO2S1 (Sensor
load at least 10 The voltage should be be-
signal) ground) JMBIA2138ZZ
times low 0.18 V at least once dur-
ing this procedure.

P0130 HO2S1
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1-II
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under
the following condition.
ECM

nector Terminal Terminal
The voltage should be above
0.68 V at least once during
65 46 Keeping engine
this procedure.
F48 (HO2S1 (Sensor speed at idle for
The voltage should be below
signal) ground) 10 minutes JMBIA2139ZZ
this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1-III
ECM

Coasting from 80 above 0.68 V at least once
65 46
km/h (50 MPH) in D during this procedure.
F48 (HO2S1 (Sensor
position (A/T), 4th The voltage should be be-
gear position (M/T) low 0.18 V at least once
during this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0131 HO2S1
P0131 HO2S1
A

V.
SEF327R E
SEF288D
I
MALFUNCTION
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 1, ECM monitors K
whether the voltage is unusually low during the various driving condi-
JMBIA0612ZZ
N
O
Heated oxygen sensor 1 • Harness or connectors
P0131 An excessively high voltage from the sen-
circuit low voltage (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) P
sor is sent to ECM.

1.FOR MALFUNCTION

P0131 HO2S1
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1. Make sure that fuel tank is not empty.

P0131 HO2S1
EC
ABBWA0395GB
P

P0131 HO2S1
YES >> GO TO 2.
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 3.
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity
HO2S1 ECM
Ground Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.

YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:

P0131 HO2S1
>> INSPECTION END

EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
1.INSPECTION START
D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3. E
With CONSULT-III
4. Start engine. G
CONSULT-III.
H
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
M
Without CONSULT-III
3. Start engine. N
O
ECM

nector
P
Terminal Terminal
65 46
F48 (HO2S1 (Sensor
ing this procedure.

P0131 HO2S1
NO >> GO TO 4.
ECM

this procedure.
this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 5.
ECM

65 46
F48 (HO2S1 (Sensor
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0132 HO2S1
P0132 HO2S1
A

V.
SEF327R E
SEF288D
I

MALFUNCTION
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 1, ECM monitors
whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving con- K
dition such as fuel-cut.
JMBIA0614ZZ
• Harness or connectors O
Heated oxygen sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the sen-
P0132 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
circuit high voltage sor is sent to ECM.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE P
1.FOR MALFUNCTION
TESTING CONDITION:

P0132 HO2S1
>> GO TO 2.

P0132 HO2S1
EC
ABBWA0395GB
P

P0132 HO2S1
YES >> GO TO 2.
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 3.
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity
HO2S1 ECM
Ground Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.

YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:

P0132 HO2S1
>> INSPECTION END

EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
1.INSPECTION START
D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3. E
With CONSULT-III
4. Start engine. G
CONSULT-III.
H
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
M
Without CONSULT-III
3. Start engine. N
O
ECM

nector
P
Terminal Terminal
65 46
F48 (HO2S1 (Sensor
ing this procedure.

P0132 HO2S1
NO >> GO TO 4.
ECM

this procedure.
this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 5.
ECM

65 46
F48 (HO2S1 (Sensor
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0133 HO2S1
P0133 HO2S1
A

V.
SEF327R E
SEF288D
I

To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1, this diagnosis
measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal. The time
is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback K
control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 temperature index.
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
L
M
PBIB2991E
N
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
(The sensor circuit is open or short- O
ed.)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 • The response of the voltage signal from the • Fuel pressure
P0133
circuit slow response sensor takes more than the specified time. • Fuel injector P
• PCV valve

1.PRECONDITIONING
P0133 HO2S1
TESTING CONDITION:
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
5. Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0133” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Is “COMPLETED” displayed on CONSULT-III?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT-III?
NG >> Go to EC-690, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
- Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 60 seconds.
- Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-606, "Component Function Check".
2. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-III
screen.
3. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-606, "Component Function Check".
4. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT-III?
5.CHECK AIR-FUEL RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
With GST
2. Select Service $01 with GST.
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Is the total percentage within ±12%?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
• Incorrect fuel pressure
• Lack of fuel
• Fuel injector
• Incorrect PCV hose connection
• PCV valve

P0133 HO2S1
A
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
7.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE EC
2. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
C
4. Drive vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more at least 10 consecutive minutes.
CAUTION:
5. Check 1st trip DTC. D
NO >> INSPECTION END E

P0133 HO2S1
ABBWA0395GB

2. Check ground connection E15 and E24. Refer to Ground Inspection in EC-618, "Ground Inspection".
P0133 HO2S1
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. A
Loosen and retighten the heated oxygen sensor 1.
EC
Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)
C
>> GO TO 3.
D
G
SEC502D
Is exhaust gas leak detected?

YES >> Repair or replace. H
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK I
Is intake air leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace. J
NO >> GO TO 5.
K
3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
L
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity
M
F12 1 F48 46 existed
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT O

3. Check the continuity between HO2S1 harness connector and ECM harness connector. P
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity

P0133 HO2S1
HO2S1 ECM
Ground Continuity
YES >> GO TO 7.
Check mass air flow sensor.
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK PCV VALVE
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace PCV valve.
Perform EC-692, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.
>> INSPECTION END

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
4. Start engine.
CONSULT-III.

P0133 HO2S1
A
EC
PBIB3458E
“HO2S1 (B1)” should be above 0.68 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. D
YES >> INSPECTION END E
NO >> GO TO 6.
F
Without CONSULT-III
3. Start engine. G
H
ECM

nector Terminal Terminal I
65 46
4,000 rpm under no during this procedure. J
F48 (HO2S1 (Sensor
ing this procedure.
K
NO >> GO TO 4. L
the following condition. M
ECM
N
Con-
The voltage should be above O
this procedure.
0.18 V at least once during P
this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 5.

P0133 HO2S1
ECM

65 46
F48 (HO2S1 (Sensor
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0134 HO2S1
P0134 HO2S1
A

V.
SEF327R E
SEF288D
I

0.5 V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is K
M
JMBIA0613ZZ
N
P0134 (The sensor circuit is open) O
circuit open approx.0.4 - 0.5 V.

P
1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:

P0134 HO2S1
>> GO TO 2.

P0134 HO2S1
EC
ABBWA0395GB
P

P0134 HO2S1
YES >> GO TO 2.
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 3.
HO2S1 ECM
Continuity
HO2S1 ECM
Ground Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.

YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:

P0134 HO2S1
>> INSPECTION END

EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
1.INSPECTION START
D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3. E
With CONSULT-III
4. Start engine. G
CONSULT-III.
H
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
M
Without CONSULT-III
3. Start engine. N
O
ECM

nector
P
Terminal Terminal
65 46
F48 (HO2S1 (Sensor
ing this procedure.

P0134 HO2S1
NO >> GO TO 4.
ECM

this procedure.
this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 5.
ECM

65 46
F48 (HO2S1 (Sensor
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0136 HO2S2
P0136 HO2S2
A

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
ditions. D
SEF327R E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC F

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen
sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time.
MALFUNCTION G
0.5 V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is
H
J
JMBIA0613ZZ
K
P0136 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) L
circuit approx.0.4 - 0.5 V.

M
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION O

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. P

P0136 HO2S2
ABBWA0397GB

P0136 HO2S2
YES >> GO TO 2.
EC
HO2S2 ECM
C
Continuity
F13 1 F48 47 Existed D
YES >> GO TO 3. E
F
HO2S2 ECM G
Continuity
H
HO2S2 ECM
Ground Continuity I
3. Also check harness for short to power. J
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
Check connectors for water. L

YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 N

O
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 P
CAUTION:

P0136 HO2S2
>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III.
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III
JMBIA2141ZZ

P0136 HO2S2
ECM A

EC
above 0.68 V at least once
66 46 Revving up to 4,000
F48 (HO2S2 (Sensor rpm under no load
The voltage should be be- C
signal) ground) at least 10 times
low 0.18 V at least once
Is the inspection result normal? D
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II E
F
ECM

G
above 0.68 V at least once H
F48 (HO2S2 (Sensor speed at idle for 10
The voltage should be be-
signal) ground) minutes JMBIA2142ZZ
during this procedure. I
NO >> GO TO 5. J
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under K
ECM L
The voltage should be M
66 46
F48 (HO2S2 (Sensor
signal) ground) JMBIA2143ZZ N
gear position (M/T) low 0.18 V at least once dur-
ing this procedure.
O
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 P
CAUTION:

P0136 HO2S2
>> INSPECTION END

P0137 HO2S2
P0137 HO2S2
A

ditions. D
SEF327R E

G
MALFUNCTION
whether the voltage is unusually low during the various driving condi-
H
JMBIA0612ZZ
• Harness or connectors L
P0137 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
circuit low voltage sor is sent to ECM.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M
1.FOR MALFUNCTION
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at N
>> GO TO 2. O
1. Make sure that fuel tank is not empty. P

P0137 HO2S2
ABBWA0397GB


P0137 HO2S2
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EC

C
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity D
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F
1. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector. G
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
I
HO2S2 ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal J
K
YES >> GO TO 4.
L
M
YES >> GO TO 5. N
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 O
YES >> GO TO 7. P
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:

P0137 HO2S2
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III.
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III

P0137 HO2S2
under the following condition. A
ECM
(+) (–) Condition Voltage EC
Con-
C
signal) ground) at least 10 times JMBIA2141ZZ
low 0.18 V at least once D
NO >> GO TO 4.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under F
ECM G

nector Terminal Terminal H
F48 (HO2S2 (Sensor speed at idle for 10 I
Is the inspection result normal? J
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III K

L
ECM
Con- (+) (–) Condition Voltage M

66 46
Coasting from 80 above 0.68 V at least once N
F48 (HO2S2 (Sensor
ing this procedure. O
NO >> GO TO 6. P

CAUTION:

P0137 HO2S2
>> INSPECTION END

P0138 HO2S2
P0138 HO2S2
A

ditions. D
SEF327R E

MALFUNCTION G
whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving con-
dition such as fuel-cut.
H
J
JMBIA0614ZZ
K
P0138 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) L
circuit high voltage sor is sent to ECM.

M
1.FOR MALFUNCTION
TESTING CONDITION:
O
>> GO TO 2.
P
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 11 minute under no
load.

P0138 HO2S2
ABBWA0397GB

P0138 HO2S2
2. Check ground connection E15 and E24. Refer to EC-618, "Ground Inspection". A
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. EC
C
D
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
F13 1 F48 47 Existed E
YES >> GO TO 3. F
3.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
HO2S2 ECM H
Continuity
I
HO2S2 ECM
Ground Continuity J
3. Also check harness for short to power. K
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L

Check connectors for water. M

YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 O

Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:

P0138 HO2S2
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III.
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III

P0138 HO2S2
under the following condition. A
ECM
Con-
C
NO >> GO TO 4.
ECM G

F48 (HO2S2 (Sensor speed at idle for 10 I
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III K

L
ECM
Con- (+) (–) Condition Voltage M

66 46
Coasting from 80 above 0.68 V at least once N
F48 (HO2S2 (Sensor
ing this procedure. O
NO >> GO TO 6. P

CAUTION:

P0138 HO2S2
>> INSPECTION END

P0139 HO2S2
P0139 HO2S2
A

ditions. D
SEF327R E

In the case that the heater element in heated oxygen sensor 2 has short circuit to the signal line, the heated
oxygen sensor 2 signal becomes greater than 2 V at the heater OFF.
ECM monitors the heated oxygen sensor 2 signal at the heater OFF. G
JPBIA4503GB J
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
Heated oxygen sensor 2 ECM monitors the heated oxygen sensor 2 sig-
P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2
circuit slow response nal at the heater OFF.
L
1.PRECONDITIONING
M
N
>> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. O
4. Rev up engine to 4,000 rpm and release accelerator pedal. P

P0139 HO2S2
ABBWA0397GB

2. Check ground connection E15 and E24. Refer to Ground Inspection in EC-618, "Ground Inspection".
P0139 HO2S2
YES >> GO TO 2.
EC
C
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
D
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F
G
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
F13 4 F48 66 Existed H
HO2S2 ECM
I
Ground Continuity
F13 4 F48 66 Ground Not existed J
YES >> GO TO 4. K
4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 L
YES >> GO TO 6. M
NO >> GO TO 5.
Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. N
CAUTION:
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. O
P
>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END

P0139 HO2S2
1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III.
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III
ECM

NO >> GO TO 4.
P0139 HO2S2
the following condition. A
ECM
Con-
C
F48 (HO2S2 (Sensor speed at idle for 10
NO >> GO TO 5.
ECM G

66 46
F48 (HO2S2 (Sensor I
ing this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 6.

CAUTION:
L
>> INSPECTION END

N

P0201, P0261, P0262 FUEL INJECTOR
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
engine fuel needs.
PBIA9664J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
No. 1 cylinder fuel injector
P0201
circuit open
An excessively low or high voltage signal • Harness or connectors
P0261 is sent to ECM through the No. 1 fuel in- (No. 1 fuel injector circuit is open or shorted.)
circuit short to ground
jector • No. 1 fuel injector
P0262
circuit short to power

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and wait at least 1 second.

EC
ABBWA0398GB
P


4. Check the voltage between fuel injector harness connector and
ground.
Fuel injector
Ground Voltage
Cylinder Connector Terminal
1 F17 1
2 F18 1
Ground Battery voltage
3 F19 1
4 F20 1 PBIB0582E

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• 10 A fuse (No. 55)
3. Check the continuity between fuel injector harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Fuel injector ECM

Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
1 F17 2 59
2 F18 2 23
F48 Existed
3 F19 2 60
4 F20 2 21
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning fuel injector.

2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector. A
3. Check resistance between fuel injector terminals as follows.
Terminals Resistance EC
1 and 2 11.1 - 14.3 Ω [at 10 -60°C (50 - 140°F)]
C

engine fuel needs.
PBIA9664J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
P0202
circuit open
P0265

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
YES >> Go to EC-730, "Component Inspection".

EC
ABBWA0398GB
P


ground.
Fuel injector
Ground Voltage
1 F17 1
2 F18 1
3 F19 1
4 F20 1 PBIB0582E

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• 10 A fuse (No. 55)
Fuel injector ECM

Continuity
1 F17 2 59
2 F18 2 23
F48 Existed
3 F19 2 60
4 F20 2 21
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.

1 and 2 11.1 - 14.3 Ω [at 10 -60°C (50 - 140°F)]
C

engine fuel needs.
PBIA9664J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
P0203
circuit open
P0268

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.

EC
ABBWA0398GB
P


ground.
Fuel injector
Ground Voltage
1 F17 1
2 F18 1
3 F19 1
4 F20 1 PBIB0582E

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• 10 A fuse (No. 55)
Fuel injector ECM

Continuity
1 F17 2 59
2 F18 2 23
F48 Existed
3 F19 2 60
4 F20 2 21
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.

1 and 2 11.1 - 14.3 Ω [at 10 -60°C (50 - 140°F)]
C

engine fuel needs.
PBIA9664J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
P0204
circuit open
P0271

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.

EC
ABBWA0398GB
P


ground.
Fuel injector
Ground Voltage
1 F17 1
2 F18 1
3 F19 1
4 F20 1 PBIB0582E

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• 10 A fuse (No. 55)
Fuel injector ECM

Continuity
1 F17 2 59
2 F18 2 23
F48 Existed
3 F19 2 60
4 F20 2 21
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.

1 and 2 11.1 - 14.3 Ω [at 10 -60°C (50 - 140°F)]
C


PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors
P0222
1 circuit low input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
cuit is shorted.]
shorted.)
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
P0223
1 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1)
(APP sensor 1)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
ABBWA0399GB
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3646E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

nector.

Continuity
F7 1 F48 34 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
ECM Sensor
34 TP sensor F7 2
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK APP SENSOR

YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 7. A
EC
>> INSPECTION END

C
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. D
nector.
E
Continuity
F7 4 F48 52 Existed F
G
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
nector.
I
Continuity
J
F7 2 F48 71 Existed
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR L
M
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.
11.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR N
O
>> INSPECTION END
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P
>> INSPECTION END


ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
More than
0.36 V
(TP sensor (Sensor
1 signal) ground) Fully de- Less than
F48
pedal Less than
4.75 V
(TP sensor (Sensor
pressed 0.36 V
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


>> END

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
A

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
C
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. D
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the 1st trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MIL will blink. E
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) G
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. H
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire detected Multiple cylinder misfire. • Improper spark plug
• Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire detected No. 1 cylinder misfires.
• Incorrect fuel pressure J
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected No. 2 cylinder misfires. • The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
• Fuel injector
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires.
• Intake air leak
• The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted K
• Lack of fuel
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. • Signal plate
• Incorrect PCV hose connection L

1.PRECONDITIONING M
N
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I O
3. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
P
NO >> GO TO 3.

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when
driving.
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed Time

More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
Is intake air leak detected?
YES >> Discover air leak location and repair.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
YES-1 >> With CONSULT-III: GO TO 3.
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace it.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Start engine and let engine idle.

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
A
YES >> GO TO 5. EC
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for fuel injector, refer to EC-
726, "Component Inspection".
C
PBIB3332E
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I D
CAUTION:
E
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro- F
cedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. G
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. H
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal I
tion. J

K
CAUTION:
shock while checking, because the electrical discharge L

voltage becomes 20kV or more.
NOTE: M
functioning.
N
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II O
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and P

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-770, "Component Inspection
(Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)".
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
7.CHECK SPARK PLUG

YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
NO >> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 8.
SEF156I


NO >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-257, "Standard
and Limit".
9.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-213, "On-Vehicle Service".
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-934, "Inspection".
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-934, "Inspection".
At idling: Approximately 420 kPa (4.2 bar, 4.28 kg/cm2)

YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.
Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”.
For procedure, refer to EC-516, "IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-937, "Idle Speed" and EC-937, "Ignition Timing".
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Follow the EC-516, "IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement".

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. A
With CONSULT-III EC
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
For specification, refer to EC-606, "Component Function Check".
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. C
For specification, refer to EC-606, "Component Function Check".
Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 15. D
NO >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-642, "DTC Logic".
15. CHECK SYMPTOM TABLE E
Check items on the rough idle symptom inEC-924, "Symptom Table".

Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 16.
16.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC G
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-585, "Diagnosis Descrip-
tion". H
>> GO TO 17.
17.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I

J
>> INSPECTION END

P0327 KS
P0327 KS
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a
voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detected condition Possible cause
name
Knock sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0327 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
low input sent to ECM.
• Knock sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Maintain the following conditions for 1 consecutive minute.
More than 1,240 rpm (A/T)

Engine speed
More than 2,500 rpm (M/T)
More than 70 km/h (43 MPH) (A/T)
Vehicle speed
More than 100 km/h (62 MPH) (M/T)

P0327 KS
EC
AABWA0192GB
P

P0327 KS
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Knock sensor ECM

Continuity
1 63
F14 F48 Existed
2 44
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace knock sensor.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
3. Check resistance between knock sensor terminals as follows.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure
more than 10 MΩ.
1 and 2 Approx. 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones. SEF227W

NO >> Replace knock sensor.

P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
A
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing EC
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth C
change. D
changes.
PBIA9209J E
H
PBIB2997E

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

J
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not detected by the ECM during the first K
few seconds of engine cranking.
is open or shorted.]
• The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft
Crankshaft position sen- (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 cir-
P0335 position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
sor (POS) circuit cuit is shorted.)
while the engine is running. L
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
• Accelerator pedal position sensor 2
is not in the normal pattern during engine run-
• Signal plate
ning.
M
1.PRECONDITIONING
N
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V with igni- O
tion switch ON.
>> GO TO 2. P

If engine does not start, crank engine for at least 2 seconds.

ABBWA0401GB

2. Check ground connection E15 and E24. Refer to EC-618, "Ground Inspection". A
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. EC
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector.
C
3. Check the voltage between CKP sensor (POS) harness connec-
tor and ground.
D
CKP sensor (POS)
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E
YES >> GO TO 8. F
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9583J
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II G

3. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector. H
CKP sensor (POS) ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal I
J
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K
ECM Sensor L
F48 12 CKP sensor (POS) F15 1
M
YES >> GO TO 5. N
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
O
YES >> GO TO 9. P
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Continuity
F15 3 F48 6 Existed
YES >> GO TO 9.
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace the signal plate.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I

3. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.

5. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
YES >> GO TO 2.
EC
PBIA9210J
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II D
Check resistance between crankshaft position sensor (POS) termi-

nals as follows.
E
Terminals (Polarity) Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 (+) - 2 (-) F
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ Ω
2 (+) - 3 (-)
G
YES >> INSPECTION END PBIA9584J
H

P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of

signals.
PBIA9875J
change.
PBIB2997E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
(TP sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
cuit is shorted.]
shorted.)
Camshaft position sen- • The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
P0340 (TP sensor)
sor (PHASE) circuit during engine running.
(APP sensor 1)
• Camshaft (INT)
• Starter motor (Refer to SC-8, "System
Description".)
• Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-8,
"System Description".)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:

tion switch ON. A
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE EC

If engine does not start, crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
C
YES >> Go to EC-760, "Diagnosis Procedure". D

ABBWA0402GB
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate?

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check starting system. A
EC
YES >> GO TO 3.
C
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector. D
3. Check the voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness con-
nector and ground. E
CMP sensor (PHASE)

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal F
G
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 4.
PBIA9583J
4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II H

3. Check the continuity between CMP (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector. I
CMP sensor (PHASE) ECM

Continuity J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit 1.
5.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L
M
ECM Sensor
15 Refrigerant pressure sensor E17 3 N
34 TP sensor F7 2
O
YES >> GO TO 6. P
6.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.


YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
>> INSPECTION END

9.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END

11.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 13.
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

14.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT) A

EC
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
C
PBIA9557J
15.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
1.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-I
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. H
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
5. Visually check the sensor for chipping. I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). J
PBIA9876J
L
2.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-II
Check resistance camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminals as
follows. M
Terminals (Polarity) Resistance

N
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
2 (+) - 3 (-) O
NO >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). P

P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354 IGNITION COIL
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• If DTC P0351, P0352, P0353 or P0354 is displayed with DTC P0335 or P0340 perform the trouble diag-
nosis for DTC P0335 or P0340. Refer to EC-753, "DTC Logic" or EC-758, "DTC Logic".
An excessively low or high voltage signal
No. 1 cylinder ignition (No. 1 ignition coil circuit is open or shorted.)
P0351 is sent to ECM through the No. 1 ignition
coil circuit • No. 1 power transistor unit built into ignition coil
coil.
• Condenser
coil.
• Condenser
coil.
• Condenser
coil.
• Condenser

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to START for at least 5 seconds.)
NG >> INSPECTION END
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Does the engine start?

2.IGNITION SIGNAL FUNCTION A

With CONSULT-III
2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. EC
NO >> Go to EC-767, "Diagnosis Procedure". C
3.IGNITION SIGNAL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle. D
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM harness connector termi-
nals as follows.
E
ECM
(+) (−) Voltage signal
F
9
10 G
28 JMBIA2144GB
F48 E58 121
H
29
JMBIA0085GB
NOTE: I
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
YES >> INSPECTION END J

ABBWA0405GB

EC
AABWA0346GB
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006402032 P
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I


as follows.
ECM
(+) (–) Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2. JMBIA2145ZZ
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
4. Check the voltage between condenser harness connector and
ground.
Condenser
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0624E
3.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

3. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and condenser harness connector.
IPDM E/R Condenser

Continuity
E43 3 F26 1 Existed
NO >> GO TO 4.
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
5.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between condenser harness connector and ground.
Condenser
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F26 2 Ground Existed

YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK CONDENSER EC
Refer to EC-771, "Component Inspection (Condenser)"

YES >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace condenser.
7.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V D
3. Turn ignition switch ON. E
4. Check the voltage between ignition coil harness connector and ground.
Ignition coil F
Ground Voltage
1 F34 3
G
2 F35 3
3 F36 3
4 F37 3 H
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors. I
8.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
2. Check the continuity between ignition coil harness connector and ground.
Ignition coil K
Ground Continuity
1 F34 2
2 F35 2
L
Ground Existed
3 F36 2
4 F37 2
M
YES >> GO TO 9. N
9.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
O
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ignition coil harness connector.
P
Ignition coil ECM
Continuity
1 F34 1 10
2 F35 1 28
F48 Existed
3 F36 1 9
4 F37 1 29

YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer toEC-770, "Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)".
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor) INFOID:0000000006402033
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-I

3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminals Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞ Ω
1 and 3
Except 0 Ω
2 and 3
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transis- PBIB0847E
tor.
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-II
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro-
cedure.
4. Start engine.

0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal A
12. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
EC
portion.

C
CAUTION:
shock while checking, because the electrical discharge D

• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm 0.66 in) is taken.
NOTE: E
functioning.
F
NO >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.
Component Inspection (Condenser) INFOID:0000000006402034 G
1.CHECK CONDENSER
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals as follows.
I
1 and 2 Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
J
NO >> Replace condenser.
K
PBIB0794E

P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen

sensors 1 and 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2
approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold)
malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF484YF
• Three way catalyst (manifold)
• Exhaust tube
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate
P0420 Catalyst system efficiency properly.
• Fuel injector
0420 below threshold • Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
• Fuel injector leaks
enough oxygen storage capacity.
• Spark plug
• Improper ignition timing
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK

Without CONSULT-III
5. Open engine hood.
6. Check the voltage between ECM harness connectors terminals under the following conditions.
(+) (−)
Condition Voltage
The voltage fluctuation cycle takes
66 Keeping engine speed at 2,500
F48 F48 47 more than 5 seconds.
(HO2S2 signal) rpm constant under no load
1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0
1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
YES >> GO TO 2.

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
A
EC
SEC502D
Is exhaust gas leak detected? D

YES >> Repair or replace.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK E
Is intake air leak detected? F
YES >> Repair or replace.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK IGNITION TIMING G
Check the following items. Refer to EC-516, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement".
Idle speed
H
Transmission Condition Specifications
A/T No load (P or N position) 700 ± 50 rpm
M/T No load (Neutral position) 700 ± 50 rpm I
Ignition timing
Specifications
Transmission Condition J
E22 (Gasoline) E100 (Ethanol)
No load (P or N
A/T 3 ± 5° BTDC 7 ± 5° BTDC
position)
K
No load (Neutral
M/T 3 ± 5° BTDC 7 ± 5° BTDC
position)
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Follow the EC-516, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement".
5.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR M
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals as follows.
N
(+) (−)
Voltage
O
21
23
F48 F48 5 Battery voltage
59 P
60
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Perform EC-725, "Diagnosis Procedure".
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro-
cedure.
3. Start engine.
tion.

CAUTION:

voltage becomes 20kV or more.
NOTE:
functioning.
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 7.

YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-767, "Diagnosis Procedure".
8.CHECK SPARK PLUG
YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
NO >> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 9.
SEF156I

9.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III A

2. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded portion.
EC
NO >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-257, "Standard
and Limit".
D
2. Remove fuel injector assembly. E
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
F
4. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
Does fuel drip from fuel injector?
G
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H
Is the trouble fixed?
YES >> INSPECTION END I
NO >> Replace three way catalyst assembly.

P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
VALVE
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
PBIA9215J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
An excessively low voltage signal is sent
P0444 control solenoid valve circuit shorted.)
to ECM through the valve
open • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve
An excessively high voltage signal is sent (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
P0445 control solenoid valve circuit
to ECM through the valve • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
shorted
lenoid valve

1.CONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.

VALVE
EC
AABWA0195GB
P
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.

VALVE
4. Check the voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve harness connector and ground.

control solenoid valve Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. PBIB0148E

• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ECM harness connector.

ECM
control solenoid valve Continuity
4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed var-
ies according to the valve opening.
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

VALVE
>> INSPECTION END
A
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE EC

With CONSULT-III
C
3. Disconnect EVAP purge hoses connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
5. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
6. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG D
VOL CONT/V” opening and check air passage continuity of
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the
following conditions. E
Condition Air passage continuity

(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
F
100% Existed
0% Not existed
PBIA9668J G
Without CONSULT-III
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Disconnect EVAP purge hoses connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
4. Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume
I
control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Air passage continuity

Condition J
between A and B
12 V direct current supply between
Existed
terminals 1 and 2
K
No supply Not existed
L
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
M

P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank
and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to
the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output volt-
age changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-620, "Description"
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after along distance has been
driven.
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does
shorted)
Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range oven
P0461 • Harness or connectors
range/performance though the vehicle has been drivien a loud dis-
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
tane.
• Combination meter
• Fuel level sensor

Perform component function check. Refer to EC-780, "Component Function Check".
Use component function check to check the overall function of the fuel level censor function. During this
1.PRECONDITIONING
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer toFL-11,
"Removal and Installation (Main Fuel Tank)"
TESTING CONDITION:
Before stating component function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Start step 10, If it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 L (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 lmp
gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-934, "Inspection".
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.

4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at lease 10 seconds then turn ON. A
6. Select "FUEL LEVEL SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
7. Check "FUEL LEVEL SE" output voltage and note it.
8. Select "FUEL PUMP RELAY" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-III.
EC
9. Touch "ON" and drain fuel approximately 30 L (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 lmp gal) and stop it.
10. Check "FUEL LEVEL SE" output voltage and note it.
11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 L (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 lmp gal).
12. Check "FUEL LEVEL SE" output voltage and not it. C
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03 V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
YES >> INSPECTION END D
E
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Start step 8, If it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 L (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 lmp
gal) in advance. F
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-934, "Inspection".
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. G
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
6. Drain fuel by 30 L (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 lmp gal).
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. H
I
J
1.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER
1. Refer to DI-12, "CONSULT-III Function (METER)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair to DI-14, "Trouble Diagnosis".
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L

M
>> INSPECTION END

P0462, P0463, P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0462, P0463, P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank
and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to
the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output volt-
age changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0462, P4463 or P464 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis
for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-620, "Description"
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors
P0462
low input sent to ECM (The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0463 • Harness or connectors
high input sent to ECM
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
Fuel level sensor circuit An improper voltage from the sensor is sent to • Combination meter
P0464
open ECM • Fuel level sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at ignition
switch ON.
>> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END.
1.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

1. Refer to DI-12, "CONSULT-III Function (METER)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair to DI-14, "Trouble Diagnosis".
>> INSPECTION END

P0500 VSS
P0500 VSS
A
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control EC
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communi-
cation line.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000006029931 C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: D
U1000, U1001.Refer to EC-620, "DTC Logic".
E
to EC-622, "DTC Logic".
F
(The CAN communication line is open or short-
ed)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from • Harness or connectors G
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
when vehicle is being driven. shorted)
• Vehicle speed sensor
• Combination meter H
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

I
1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. L
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. M

N
A/T: 5.5 - 31.8 msec
B/FUEL SCHDL
M/T: 4.8 - 31.8 msec
O
Except P or N position (A/T)
Shift lever
Except Neutral position (M/T)
Steering wheel Not being tuned
P

P0500 VSS
Refer to BRC-19, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Refer to DI-12, "CONSULT-III Function (METER)".
>> INSPECTION END

P0562 BATTERY VOLTAGE
A
C
An excessively low voltage from the bat- • Battery dead (Under charge)
P0562 System voltage low
tery is sent to ECM. • Charging system
• Alternator D
1.PRECONDITIONING E
F
>> GO TO 2.
G
1. Start engine and let it idle for 3 minutes.
H
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006029934 I
1.CHECK BATTERY
Refer to SC-4, "How to Handle Battery". J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace battery. K
2.CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM

Refer to SC-23, "System Description". L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace. M
N
>> INSPECTION END

O

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
• Incorrect battery
An excessively high voltage from the bat-
P0563 System voltage high • Charging system
tery is sent to ECM.
• Alternator

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 3 minutes.
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 25 km/h (15.5 MPH) .
CAUTION:
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1.CHECK BATTERY
Check that the proper type of battery is installed.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace with the proper one.
2.CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM
Refer to SC-23, "System Description".
YES >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END

P0605 ECM
P0605 ECM
A
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal EC

PBIB1164E E
G
P0605 Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. • ECM
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. H
1.PRECONDITIONING I
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A K
Is 1st trip DTC detected? L
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B M
1. Wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
3. Wait at least 10 second. N
YES >> Go to EC-788, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
P
1. Wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn ON.

P0605 ECM
1.INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-III
3. Touch “ERASE”.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Erase the diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
ment".
>> INSPECTION END

P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF EC

or stops oil flow. C
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve D
position.
PBIB1842E E
G
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
Intake valve timing control (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P1111 through intake valve timing control solenoid
solenoid valve circuit circuit is open or shorted.)
valve.
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve H

1.PRECONDITIONING I
J
>> GO TO2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K
Is 1st trip DTC detected? L
M

AABWA0183GB
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4. Check the voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve harness connector and ground. A
IVT control solenoid valve

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal EC
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9590J
2.DETECT MALFUNCTION PART D

E
• Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
F
3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
3. Check the continuity between intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ECM har-
ness connector. H
IVT control solenoid valve ECM

Continuity
J
YES >> GO TO 4.
K
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M

N
>> INSPECTION END
O
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P

valve terminals as follows.
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIA9591J
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II

1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Make sure that the
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
NOTE:
JMBIA2107ZZ
JMBIA2110ZZ


P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
A

NOTE:
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-620, "DTC Logic". C
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise. D
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
E
(The cooling fan circuit is open or short- F
heat). • IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays-1, -2, -3)
• Cooling fan system does not operate proper- • Cooling fan motors-1, -2
Engine over tempera- ly (Overheat). • Radiator hose G
P1217
ture (Overheat) • Engine coolant was not added to the system • Radiator
using the proper filling method. • Radiator cap
• Engine coolant is not within the specified • Reservoir tank
H
range. • Water pump
• Thermostat
• Water control valve
CAUTION: I
Coolant". Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-18, "Changing Engine Oil".
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to J
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-16, "SAE Viscosity Number".
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-793, "Component Function Check". L
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might
not be confirmed.
N
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-I O

WARNING:
sure fluid escaping from the radiator. P
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Is the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator below the
proper range?
NO >> GO TO 2.
SEF621W
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II

Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not.
Did customer fill the coolant?
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III
With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that cooling fan motors-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI).
Without CONSULT-III
Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-19, "Auto Active Test".
1.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that cooling fan motors-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI).
Without CONSULT-III
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-19, "Auto Active
Test".
2. Make sure that cooling fan motors-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High).
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK-I
Check cooling system for leak. Refer to CO-23, "Inspection".
Is leakage detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK-II
Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-23, "Inspection".
• Hose
• Radiator
• Water pump
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

4.CHECK RADIATOR CAP A

Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-26, "Checking Radiator Cap".
YES >> GO TO 5. EC
NO >> Replace radiator cap.
5.CHECK THERMOSTAT
C
Check thermostat. Refer to CO-34, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 6. D
NO >> Replace thermostat.
6.CHECK WATER CONTROL VALVE
Check water control valve. Refer to CO-37, "Removal and Installation". E
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace water control valve F
Refer to EC-660, "Component Inspection". G
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. H
8.CHECK MAIN 13 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, check the following.
I
OFF 1 • Blocked radiator • Visual No blocking
• Blocked condenser J
—
• Blocked bumper
2 • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester MA-16, "SAE Viscosity Number" K
3 • Coolant level • Visual Coolant up to MAX level in
CO-23, "Changing Engine
reservoir tank and radiator
Coolant"
filler neck L
4 • Radiator cap • Pressure tester CO-26, "Checking Radiator Cap"
ON*2 5 • Coolant leaks • Visual No leaks CO-23, "Inspection"

M
ON*2 6 • Thermostat • Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot
CO-34, "Component"
lower radiator hoses
ON*1 7 • Cooling fan motor • CONSULT-III Operating EC-873, "Component

Function Check" N
OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak • Color checker chemical Negative
—
tester 4 Gas analyzer
9 • Coolant temperature • Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when O
ON*3 —
gauge driving
• Coolant overflow to res- • Visual No overflow during driving
CO-23, "Inspection"
ervoir tank and idling P
OFF* 4 10 • Coolant return from res- • Visual Should be initial level in
CO-23, "Inspection"
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank
• Remove and inspect CO-37, "Removal and In-
OFF 11 • Water control valve Within the specified value
the valve stallation"

OFF 12 • Cylinder head • Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-214, "Removal and
gauge mum distortion (warping) Installation"
13 • Cylinder block and pis- • Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-230, "Disassembly
tons walls or piston and Assembly"
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
For more information, refer to CO-19, "Troubleshooting Chart".
>> INSPECTION END

P1299 TP SENSOR
P1299 TP SENSOR
A

kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into C
valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the D
PBIB0145E E

NOTE:
If DTC P1299 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
G
• Battery
• Engine coolant temperature sensor H
• Intake air temperature sensor
Throttle valve closed po-
Closed throttle position learning is not per- • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P1299 sition learning perfor-
formed successfully. • Electric throttle control actuator I
mance
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
(APP sensor 1 and 2) J
• Vehicle speed sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING K
L
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M
Is 1st trip DTC detected? N
O
1.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING P

>> GO TO 2.
2.ERASE DTC
With CONSULT-III
P1299 TP SENSOR
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS“ mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “ERASE“.
Without CONSULT-III
Is DTC erased?
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BATTERY
Refer to SC-4, "How to Handle Battery".
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace battery.
Refer toEC-660, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END

10.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.

P1299 TP SENSOR
11.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY A

2. Go toEC-839, "Special Repair Requirement".
EC
>> INSPECTION END
12.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
C
Refer toEC-783, "Description".
YES >> GO TO 13. D
Refer to EC-614, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
>> INSPECTION END

F

P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
Refer to EC-553, "System Description" for the ASCD function.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
EC-787, "DTC Logic".
Trouble diagnosis
name
• An excessively high voltage signal from the
ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM.
• ECM detects that input signal from the
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
P1564 ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch is out of the specified
• ASCD steering switch
range.
• ECM
• ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch
is stuck ON.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2. Wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 sec-
onds.
6. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
ABBWA0407GB
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
as follows.
ECM
(+) (–) Condition Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
MAIN switch: Pressed Approx. 0
CANCEL switch:
Approx. 1
Pressed
JMBIA2146ZZ
108 100 SET/COAST switch:
Approx. 2
E58 (ASCD steering (Sensor Pressed
switch signal) ground)
RESUME/ACCELER-
Approx. 3
ATE switch: Pressed
All ASCD steering
Approx. 4
switches: Released
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Disconnect combination switch harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between combination switch and ECM harness connector.
Combination switch ECM

Continuity
Terminal Connector Terminal
15 E58 100 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and combination switch.
Combination switch ECM

Continuity
Terminal Connector Terminal
14 E58 108 Existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6. A
EC
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
C
7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH D
YES >> GO TO 8. E
NO >> Replace ASCD steering switch.
F
>> INSPECTION END G

1.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH H

1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector.
2. Check the continuity between combination switch harness con-
nector terminals under following conditions. I
Combination meter
Condition Resistance J
Connector Terminals
MAIN switch: Pressed Approx. 0 Ω
CANCEL switch: Pressed Approx. 250 Ω K
SET/COAST switch: Pressed Approx. 660 Ω
M31 14 and 15
RESUME/ACCELERATE
Approx. 1,480 Ω PBIB2549E
switch: Pressed L
All ASCD steering switches:
Approx. 4,000 Ω
Released
NO >> Replace ASCD steering switch
N

P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON.
ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
Trouble diagnosis
name
When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h • Harness or connectors
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent • Harness or connectors
to the ECM at the same time. (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
(The ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted.)
(M/T)
P1572 ASCD brake switch
• Stop lamp switch
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to • ASCD brake switch
B) ECM for extremely long time while the ve- • ASCD clutch switch (M/T)
hicle is driving. • Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
• Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
• Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation (M/T)
• ECM

1.PRECONDITIONING
NOTE:
Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for mal-
function B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be
detected.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A - I
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON wait at least 10 seconds.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A - II
With CONSULT-III
1. Drive the vehicle for at least 10 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. A
If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 mph) EC

Selector lever Suitable position
Depress the brake pedal for more than
Driving location five seconds so as not to come off from C
the above-mentioned vehicle speed.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? D
E

ABBWA0408GB
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I


as follows. A
ECM
(+) (–) EC
Con- Condition Voltage
nector Termi-
Terminal
nal
Slightly
C
94 Brake pedal (A/T) Approx. 0 V
depressed
E58 (ASCD brake 121 Brake pedal and
switch signal) clutch pedal (M/T) Fully re- Battery JMBIA2147ZZ
leased voltage D

YES >> GO TO 2. E
NO-1 >> A/T models: GO TO 3.
NO-1 >> M/T models: GO TO 7.
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II F
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals as fol-

lows.
G
ECM
(+) (–) H
nector Termi-
Terminal
nal
Slightly de- I
pressed
E58 (Stop lamp 121 Brake pedal and
leased voltage
J

YES >> GO TO 18. K
NO >> GO TO 14.
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between ASCD brake switch harness con- M
nector and ground.
ASCD brake switch N

Connec- Ground Voltage
Terminal
tor
E36 1 Ground Battery voltage O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4. PBIB0857E P
• Junction block connector M69, E7
• 10 A fuse (No.2)
• Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse

5.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM ASCD harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
ASCD brake switch ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-810, "Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
7.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between ASCD clutch switch harness con-
nector and ground.
ASCD clutch switch

Ground Condition Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
Slightly de-
Approx. 0
E35 1 Ground Brake pedal pressed
Fully released Battery voltage
PBIB0857E
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 8.
4. Check the voltage between ASCD brake switch harness con-
nector and ground.
ASCD brake switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 1 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
PBIB0857E

• Harness connector M69, E7

• 10A fuse (No.2)
• Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse A
10.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EC

C
3. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch harness connector and ASCD clutch switch harness
connector.
D
ASCD brake switch ASCD clutch switch
Continuity
E35 2 E36 1 Existed E
YES >> GO TO 11. F
11.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH G
YES >> GO TO 18. H
3. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
J
ECM ASCD clutch switch
Continuity
K
YES >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH M
Refer to EC-811, "Component Inspection (ASCD Clutch Switch)".
N
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
14.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT O
3. Check the voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground. P
Stop lamp switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 15.
• 10 A fuse (No. 7)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and stop lamp switch harness connector.
ECM Stop lamp switch

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 17.
Refer to EC-811, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) INFOID:0000000006029967
1.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH-I

3. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
under the following conditions.
Terminals Condition Continuity

Fully released Existed
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Not existed
NO >> GO TO 2.
SEC023D
2.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH-II

1. Adjust ASCD brake switch installation. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".

under the following conditions. A

Fully released Existed EC
1 and 2 Brake pedal
SEC023D
D
Component Inspection (ASCD Clutch Switch) INFOID:0000000006029968
1.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH-I E

3. Check the continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals
under the following conditions. F

G
1 and 2 Clutch pedal
Is the inspection result normal? H
NO >> GO TO 2.
SEC023D
I
2.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH-II
1. Adjust ASCD clutch switch installation. Refer to CL-6, "On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Check the continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals J
Terminals Condition Continuity K

L
NO >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. M
SEC023D
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000006029969
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I N

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. O
3. Check the continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions.
PBIB2285E


Fully released Not existed
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Existed
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II
1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
PBIB2285E

1 and 2 Brake pedal

P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
A
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combina- EC
tion meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer to EC-553, "System Description" for ASCD functions.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: D
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-620, "DTC Logic".
E
to EC-783, "DTC Logic"
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer F
to EC-787, "DTC Logic"
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause G
name
shorted.) H
(Combination meter circuit is open or shorted.)
ASCD vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
P1574 • Combination meter
sensor speed signals is out of the specified range.
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Wheel sensor
I
• TCM (A/T models)
• ECM
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at K
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V at idle. L
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M
1. Start engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
CAUTION: N
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. O
If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected? P
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
Refer to BRC-19, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check combination meter function.
>> INSPECTION END

P1706 PNP SWITCH
P1706 PNP SWITCH
A
• When the shift lever position is P or N, transmission range switch is ON (A/T models). EC
• When the neutral position, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON (M/T models).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

D
The park/neutral position (PNP) signal is not [The park/neutral position (PNP) signal E
Park/neutral position
P1706 changed in the process of engine starting and circuit is open or shorted.]
switch
driving. • Transmission range switch (A/T)
F
1.INSPECTION START G
YES >> GO TO 2. H
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
I
J
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III K
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” sig-
nal under the following conditions. L
Position (Shift lever) Known-good signal

N or P position (A/T) M
ON
YES >> GO TO 4.
O
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. P
CAUTION:


P1706 PNP SWITCH
A/T: 2.4 - 31.8 msec
B/FUEL SCHDL
M/T: 3.5 - 31.8 msec
VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 mph)
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-816, "Component Function Check".
NOTE:
Use component function check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit. During this

as follows.
ECM
Connec- (+) (–) Condition Voltage

tor Terminal Terminal
P or N (A/T)
Approx. 0V
27 Neutral (M/T)
F48 121 Shift lever
(PNP signal) Except
Battery voltage
above JMBIA2149ZZ


P1706 PNP SWITCH
EC
ABBWA0409GB
P
1.CHECK PNP SIGNAL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect transmission range switch (A/T) or park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T) harness connec-
tor.

P1706 PNP SWITCH
4. Check the voltage between transmission range switch (A/T) or
PNP switch (M/T) harness connector and ground.
JMBIA2156ZZ
A/T models
Transmission range switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F25 (A) 1 Ground Battery voltage
M/T models
PNP switch
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F24 (B) 2 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.DETECTED MALFUNCTIONING PART
• 10 A fuse [No. 54 (A/T)]
• 10 A fuse [No. 51 (M/T)]
• Harness for open or short between transmission range switch (A/T) or PNP switch (M/T) and fuse
3.CHECK PNP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between transmission range switch (A/T) or PNP switch (M/T) harness connector
and ECM harness connector.
A/T models
Transmission range switch ECM

Continuity
M/T models
PNP switch ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (A/T) OR PNP SWITCH (M/T)
P1706 PNP SWITCH
Refer to AT-96, "Component Inspection" (A/T) or MT-56, "Checking" (M/T).
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace transmission range switch (A/T) or PNP switch (M/T).

C
>> INSPECTION END

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ex- (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or short-
P1805 Brake switch
tremely long time while the vehicle is driving. ed.)
• Stop lamp switch

2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-III.

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
EC
AABWA0203GB
P
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Brake pedal Stop lamp

Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
3. Check the voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector
and ground.
Stop lamp switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2264E

• Junction block connector M69, E7
• 10 A fuse (No. 7)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and stop lamp switch harness connector.
ECM Stop lamp switch

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 5.
Refer to EC-823, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000006029982
A
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. EC
E
PBIB2285E
Terminals Condition Continuity F

1 and 2 Brake pedal
G
NO >> GO TO 2. H
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II
1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Check the continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions. I
PBIB2285E L

M
1 and 2 Brake pedal
O

P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
provided to the ECM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
P2100
relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
P2103
relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V.
Witch DTC is detected?
P2100 >> GO TO 2.
P2103 >> GO TO 3.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
AABWA0197GB
P
1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
F48 2 E43 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15 A fuse (No. 52) from IPDM E/R.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace 15 A fuse.

P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
A
response to driving condition. C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
E
or P2119. Refer to EC-824, "DTC Logic" or EC-833, "DTC Logic".
F
Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
P2101
performance ate properly. shorted)
• Electric throttle control actuator G

1.PRECONDITIONING H
TESTING CONDITION: I
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V when engine
is running.
J
>> GO TO 2.
K
3. Check DTC.
L
Is DTC detected?
M

AABWA0196GB

YES >> GO TO 2.
EC
as follows.
ECM
C
(+) (–)
Condition Voltage
Connec- Connec-
Terminal Terminal
tor tor
D
Ignition switch OFF Approx. 0 V
F48 2 E58 121
Ignition switch ON Battery voltage
JMBIA2157ZZ
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT F

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector. G
IPDM E/R ECM H

Continuity
E46 46 F48 22 Existed
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4. J

Check the following K
L
M
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity N
E43 8 F48 2 Existed
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. O
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6. P
Check the following
7.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15 A fuse (No. 52) from IPDM E/R.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace 15 A fuse.
9.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
nector.

Continuity
1 Not existed
5
3 Existed
F7 F48
1 Existed
6
3 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 10.
and the housing.
: Vehicle front

YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
BBIA0711E

YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 13.
YES >> GO TO 13.
13.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A
1. Replace malfunction electric throttle control actuator.

EC
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006029991 C

D
2. Check resistance between electric throttle control actuator termi-
nals as follows.
E
5 and 6 Approx. 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
F
NO >> GO TO 2. G
PBIB3647E
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H

I
>> INSPECTION END
J
Refer to EC-518, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement" K
>> END
L

P2109 TP SENSOR
P2109 TP SENSOR

PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P2109 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
Throttle valve closed po-
Throttle valve closed position is not memorized • Throttle valve closed position learning
P2109 sition learning perfor-
in the ECM. has not been performed.
mance

>> GO TO 2.
2.ERASE DTC
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS“ mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “ERASE“.
Without CONSULT-III
Is DTC erased?
NO >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END


>> END
P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
A
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
Electric throttle control actuator does not func-
A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
F
tion.
P2119 • Electric throttle control actuator
actuator Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
B)
G

1.PRECONDITIONING H
TESTING CONDITION:
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 10 seconds. K
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 second.
4. Set shift lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position and wait at least 5 seconds. L
5. Set shift lever to N, P (A/T) or Neutral (M/T) position.
7. Check DTC.
M
Is DTC detected?
N
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY O

P

and the housing.
: Vehicle front

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
BBIA0711E

>> INSPECTION END


>> END

P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
A

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The D
signals.
PBIB1741E E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

G
Accelerator pedal posi-
An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
• Harness or connectors H
P2122 tion sensor 1 circuit low (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
sor 1 is sent to ECM.
input (TP sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
cuit is shorted.] I
shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- • Accelerator pedal position sensor
An excessively high voltage from the APP sen-
P2123 tion sensor 1 circuit high (APP sensor 1) J
input • Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor)
K

1.PRECONDITIONING L
M
TESTING CONDITION:
N
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. O
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-836, "Diagnosis Procedure". P

ABBWA0413GB

YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
EC
3. Check the voltage between APP sensor harness connector and
ground.
C
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
D
E12 4 Ground Approx. 5 V
YES >> GO TO 8. E
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II F

3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. G
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
I
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J
ECM Sensor K
L
34 TP sensor F7 2
E58 113 APP sensor E12 4 M
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. N
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
Check the following. O
P
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK TP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 10.

NO >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END

3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 9.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR


as follows. A
ECM
Connec-
107 99 Fully released 0.6 - 0.9 V

C
(APP sensor (Sensor Fully de-
1 signal) ground) 3.9 - 4.7 V
Accelerator pressed
E58 JMBIA2158ZZ
pedal Fully released 0.3 - 0.6 V
106 98 D
pressed
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY F
G
>> INSPECTION END

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000006030006 H

Refer to EC-518, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement". I
>> END
J


signals.
PBIB1741E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Accelerator pedal posi- • Harness or connectors
An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
P2127 tion sensor 2 circuit low (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
input [Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
is shorted.]
Accelerator pedal posi- • Accelerator pedal position sensor
An excessively high voltage from the APP sen-
P2128 tion sensor 2 circuit high (APP sensor 2)
input • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
AABWA0205GB
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
ground.
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9607J

APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
ECM Sensor
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 8.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity

YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EC
C
APP sensor ECM
Continuity
E12 6 E58 106 Existed D
E
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR F
YES >> GO TO 10. G
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY H
I
>> INSPECTION END
J
>> INSPECTION END

K
1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR L

3. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals M
as follows.
ECM N
Connec- (+) (–) Condition Voltage
O
Accelerator pressed
E58 JMBIA2158ZZ P
106 98
pressed
NO >> GO TO 2.


>> INSPECTION END


>> END

P2135 TP SENSOR
P2135 TP SENSOR
A

kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into C
valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the D
PBIB0145E E
G
(TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) H
cuit is shorted.]
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
P2135 circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 I
shorted.)
mance and TP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
(APP sensor 1)
J
K
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V at idle. M
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE N
1. Start engine and keep the engine speed 2,000 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
O
Is DTC detected?
P

P2135 TP SENSOR
ABBWA0415GB

P2135 TP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
EC
C
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
D
YES >> GO TO 8. E
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3646E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II F

3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con- G
nector.

Continuity H
F7 2 F48 34 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J
K
ECM Sensor
L
34 TP sensor F7 2
M
YES >> GO TO 5. N
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
O
P
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK APP SENSOR

P2135 TP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.

Continuity
F7 4 F48 52 Existed
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.

Continuity
2 71
F7 F48 Existed
3 72
YES >> GO TO 10.
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.
2. EC-831, "Special Repair Requirement"
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END


P2135 TP SENSOR
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. A
EC
C
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal D
More than
0.36 V
(TP sensor (Sensor
1 signal) ground) Fully de- Less than E
F48
pedal Less than
4.75 V
(TP sensor (Sensor F
pressed 0.36 V
Is the inspection result normal? G
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H
I
>> INSPECTION END
Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000006030018 J

Refer to EC-518, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement" K
>> END
L

P2138 APP SENSOR
P2138 APP SENSOR

signals.
PBIB1741E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
shorted.)
is shorted.)
cuit is shorted.]
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
P2138 tion sensor circuit range/ compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 shorted.)
performance and APP sensor 2. (TP sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
(TP sensor)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

P2138 APP SENSOR
EC
ABBWA0416GB
P

P2138 APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 2.
ground.
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J

APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
ECM Sensor
34 TP sensor F7 2
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK TP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 14.

P2138 APP SENSOR
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A

EC
>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I C
Check the voltage between APP sensor harness connector and
ground.
D
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E
YES >> GO TO 12. F
NO >> GO TO 9.
PBIA9607J
9.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II G

3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. H
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
J
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K
ECM Sensor L
M
YES >> GO TO 11. N
NO >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
O
YES >> GO TO 14. P
12.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector as follows.

P2138 APP SENSOR
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
1 98
E12 E58 Existed
2 99
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or shot to power in harness or connectors.
1. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector as follows.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
3 107
E12 E58 Existed
6 106
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or shot to power in harness or connectors.
14.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 15.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR


P2138 APP SENSOR
as follows. A
ECM
Connec-

C
Accelerator pressed
E58 JMBIA2158ZZ
106 98 D
pressed
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY F
G
>> INSPECTION END

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000006030024 H

Refer to EC-518, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement". I
>> END
J

P3021, P3022, P3023 SUB FUEL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Sub fuel control solenoid valve ON/OFF is controlled by ECM. ECM

controls sub fuel control solenoid valve according to ethanol density
and engine coolant temperature, and opens or closes fuel passage
between sub fuel tank and engine.
JMBIA2081ZZ
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
As improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
P3021 through the sub fuel control solenoid
circuit open
valve.
As excessively high voltage signal is sent
Sub fuel control solenoid valve (The sub fuel control solenoid valve cir-
P3022 to ECM through the sub fuel control sole-
circuit high input cuit is open or shorted.)
noid valve.
• Sub fuel control solenoid valve
As excessively low voltage signal is sent
P3023 to ECM through the sub fuel control sole-
circuit low input
noid valve.

1.CONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
P3021 or P3023>>GO TO 2.
P3022 >> GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P3021 OR P3023
1. Turn ignition switch on and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC
2. Select "ETHANOL DENS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check that "ETHANOL DENS" is 0.50 or more.
6. Connect 10 kΩ resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.

YES >> EC-857, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END A
EC
ABBWA0417GB
1.CHECK SUB FUEL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

2. Disconnect sub fuel control solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between sub fuel control solenoid valve har-
Sub fuel control sole-

noid valve Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. JPBIA3147ZZ

• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and sub fuel control solenoid valve
• Harness for open or short between sub fuel control solenoid valve and ECM
3.CHECK SUB FUEL PUMP RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between sub fuel control solenoid valve harness connector and ECM harness con-
nector.
Sub fuel control sole-

ECM
noid valve Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SUB FUEL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace sub fuel control solenoid valve.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK SUB FUEL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

2. Disconnect sub fuel control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Disconnect fuel hoses connected to sub fuel control solenoid valve.

NOTE:
Prepare pan or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. A
4. Check fuel passage continuity of sub fuel control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
CAUTION:
Never apply voltage to sub fuel pump control solenoid
EC
valve for 6 seconds or more.
fuel passage continuity

Condition
between (A) and (B) C
12 V direct current supply between
Existed
terminals 1 and 2
D
No supply Not existed
YES >> INSPECTION END JMBIA2082ZZ
E
NO >> Replace sub fuel control solenoid valve

P3075, P3077, P3078 SUB FUEL PUMP RELAY
Sub fuel pump relay ON/OFF is controlled by ECM.ECM controls sub fuel pump relay according to ethanol
density and engine coolant temperature, and activates sub fuel pump.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
P3075 Sub fuel pump relay circuit open
through the sub fuel pump
Sub fuel pump relay circuit low An excessively low voltage signal is sent (The sub fuel pump relay circuit is open
P3077
input to ECM through the sub fuel pump or shorted.)
• Sub fuel pump relay
Sub fuel pump relay circuit high An excessively high voltage signal is sent
P3078
input to ECM through the sub fuel pump

1.CONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
P3075 or P3077>>GO TO 2.
P3078 >> GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P3075 OR P3077
1. Turn ignition switch on and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Select "ETHANOL DENS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check that "ETHANOL DENS" is 0.50 or more.
6. Connect 10 kΩ resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
8. Check 1st trip DTC
YES >> Go toEC-861, "Diagnosis Procedure".

EC
ABBWA0418GB
P
1.CHECK SUB FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

2. Disconnect sub fuel pump relay.

4. Check the voltage between sub fuel pump relay harness con-
nector and ground.
Sub fuel pump relay

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
JMBIA2151ZZ

• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and sub fuel pump relay
• Harness for open or short between sub fuel pump relay and ECM
3. Check the continuity between sub fuel pump relay harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Sub fuel pump relay ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SUB FUEL PUMP RELAY
Refer to EC-862, "Component Inspection (Sub Fuel Pump Relay)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace sub fuel pump relay.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Sub Fuel Pump Relay) INFOID:0000000006030034

2. Remove sub fuel pump relay.

3. Check the continuity between sub fuel pump relay terminals
Terminals Conditions Continuity

12 V detect current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Existed EC
3 and 5
No current supply Not existed
PBIB0098E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON.
ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
1.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH FUNCTION

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Indication
Brake pedal (A/T) Slightly depressed OFF

BRAKE SW1
Brake pedal and clutch pedal (M/T) Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
as per the following.
ECM
(+) (–)
nector Termi-
Terminal
nal
Slightly
depressed
E58 (ASCD brake 121 Brake pedal and
leased voltage

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC
ABBWA0419GB
P
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

Check which type of transmission the vehicle is equipped with.
Which type of transmission?

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A/T >> GO TO 2.
M/T >> GO TO 6.
4. Check the voltage between ASCD brake switch harness con-
nector and ground.
ASCD brake switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0857E

• 10 A fuse (No. 2)
3. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
ASCD brake switch ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 13.
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
4. Check the continuity between ASCD clutch switch harness connector and ground.
ASCD clutch switch Ground

Condition Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
Slightly depressed Approx. 0
E35 1 Ground Brake pedal
Fully released Battery voltage

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 11. A
NO >> GO TO 7.
EC
4. Check the voltage between ASCD brake switch harness con- C
nector and ground.
ASCD brake switch D

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8. F
PBIB0857E

Check the following. G
• 10A fuse (No. 2)
H

9.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I
2. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch harness connector and ASCD clutch switch harness
connector. J
ASCD brake switch ASCD clutch switch

Continuity K
E36 2 E35 1 Existed
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. L
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
N
YES >> GO TO 13.
O
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector P
3. Check the continuity between ASCD clutch switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
ASCD clutch switch ECM

Continuity

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-811, "Component Inspection (ASCD Clutch Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 13.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) INFOID:0000000006030039
1.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH-I


1 and 2 Brake pedal
NO >> GO TO 2.
SEC023D
2.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH-II

1. Adjust ASCD brake switch installation. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".

1 and 2 Brake pedal
SEC023D
Component Inspection (ASCD Clutch Switch) INFOID:0000000006030040
1.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH-I


ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Fully released Existed EC
NO >> GO TO 2.
SEC023D
2.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH-II D
1. Adjust ASCD clutch switch installation. Refer to CL-6, "On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment".
E

F
Is the inspection result normal? G
SEC023D
H

ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE lamp illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD
system is ready for operation.
SET lamp illuminates when following conditions are met.
• CRUISE lamp is illuminated.
• SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD
setting.
SET lamp remains lit during ASCD control.
1.ASCD INDICATOR FUNCTION

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD indicator Condition Specification

• MAIN switch: Pressed at the
CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
1st time →at the 2nd time
• MAIN switch: ON • ASCD: Operating ON
• When vehicle speed: Be-
SET LAMP
tween 40 km/h (25 MPH) and • ASCD: Not operating OFF
144 km/h (89 MPH).

ASCD INDICATOR
EC
AABWA0217GB
P
1.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.

ASCD INDICATOR
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-620, "DTC Logic".

COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN
A
Cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows. EC
Refer to EC-562, "System Diagram" for cooling fan operation.
C
1.CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
D
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III and touch “LOW” on the CON-
SULT-III screen.
3. Make sure that cooling fans operates at low speed. E
Without CONSULT-III
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch ON. F
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
YES >> GO TO 2. G
NO >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit.
2.CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED FUNCTION
H
With CONSULT-III
1. Touch “HI” on the CONSULT-III screen.
2. Make sure that cooling fans operates at higher speed than low speed.
I
Without CONSULT-III
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. J
4. Connect 150 Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed.
NO >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit.
L

COOLING FAN
AABWA0199GB

COOLING FAN
EC
AABWA0200GB
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006030048 P
1.CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


COOLING FAN
3. Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and
ground.
IPDM E/R
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2067E

• 50A fusible link (Models with A/C)
• 40A fusible link (Models without A/C)
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery

3.CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E46 and E48.
3. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E46 39
Ground Existed
E48 59
YES (Models with A/C)>>GO TO 4.
YES (Models without A/C)>>GO TO 6.
4.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and cooling fan motor harness connector.
IPDM E/R Cooling fan motor

Continuity
20
E44 E3 1 Existed
24
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and IPDM E/R
• Resistor E5

COOLING FAN
6.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check the continuity between cooling fan motor harness connector and ground.
EC
Cooling fan motor
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E3 2 Ground Existed C
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D
7.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. E
2. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and cooling fan motor harness connector.
IPDM E/R Cooling fan motor F

Continuity
20 1
G
E44 23 E3 3 Existed
24 2
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. H
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. I
8.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between cooling fan motor harness connector and ground.
J
Cooling fan motor

Ground Continuity K
Connector Terminal
E3 4 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors
9.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR M

YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Replace cooling fan motor.
10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT O
Perform EC-614, "Description".
P
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
COOLING FAN MOTOR

Model with A/C

COOLING FAN
check operation.
Terminals
(+) (-)
SEF888V
Models without A/C

check operation.
Terminals
Speed
(+) (−)
1 4
Low
High 1 and 2 3 and 4 SEF734W


A
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred EC
through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
C
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
2. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. D
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Indication E

ON ON
LOAD SIGNAL Rear window defogger switch
OFF OFF
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to EC-879, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
2.CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH FUNCTION
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
H
Monitor item Condition Indication
ON at 2nd position ON
LOAD SIGNAL Lighting switch I
OFF OFF
YES >> GO TO 3. J
3.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SWITCH FUNCTION
K
Select “HEATER FAN SW” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Indication L

ON ON
HEATER FAN SW Heater fan control switch
OFF OFF
N
1.INSPECTION START O
Confirm the malfunctioning circuit (rear window defogger, headlamp or heater fan). Refer to EC-879, "Compo-
nent Function Check".
Which circuit is related to the incident? P
Rear window defogger>>GO TO 2.
Headlamp>>GO TO 3.
Heater fan>>GO TO 4.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to GW-54, "Work Flow".

>> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-13, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis" .
>> INSPECTION END

4.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to ATC-37, "Self-Diagnosis Function" (AUTO A/C) or MTC-34, "Operational Check" (MANUAL A/C).
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
A
EC
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Fuel pump relay
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control ↓ C
Battery Battery voltage* Fuel pump
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine D
startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
E
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation F

Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
G
When engine is stopped Stops.
Except as shown above Stops.
H
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP FUNCTION I

2. Pinch fuel feed hose (1) with two fingers.
- Illustration shows the view with intake air duct removed.
J
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed
hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
K
NO >> EC-882, "Diagnosis Procedure".
L
BBIA0712E

FUEL PUMP
ABBWA0423GB
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I


FUEL PUMP
4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and
ground. A
ECM
(+) (−) Ground Voltage EC
F48 78 E58 121 Ground Battery voltage
C
NO >> GO TO 2. D
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector. E
3. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ECM harness connector.
ECM IPDM E/R F

Continuity
G
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 3. H
• Harness connectors E8, F8 I
J
4.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
3. Disconnect "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" harness con-
nector (1).
L
- : Vehicle front
- Illustration shows the view with rear seat removed.
M
BBIA0702E

FUEL PUMP
5. Check the voltage between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel
pump" harness connector and ground.
Fuel level sensor unit

and fuel pump Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B100 1 Ground Existed
Voltage: Battery violate should exist for 1 sec-

ond after ignition switch is turn ON. MBIB1446E

YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK 15 A FUSE
3. Check 15 A fuse.
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace fuse.
6.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
2. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump"
harness connector.
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel

IPDM E/R
pump Continuity
E45 36 B100 1 Existed
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• Harness connectors E7, M69
• Harness connectors M12, B101
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”

8.CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Check the continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector and ground.
Fuel level sensor unit

and fuel pump Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B100 3 Ground Existed
2. Also heck harness for short to power.
YES >> GO TO 10.

FUEL PUMP
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

• Harness connectors B133, D400
EC
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground

C
10.CHECK FUEL PUMP
Refer to EC-885, "Component Inspection (Fuel Pump)".
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace fuel pump.
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

F
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R"
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. G
Component Inspection (Fuel Pump) INFOID:0000000006030057
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP H

2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
3. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” I
terminals as follows.
Terminals Resistance J
1 and 3 0.2 - 5.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
NO >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
L
SEC918C

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is located on the combination

meter.
The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check.
When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains
on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system
malfunction.
For details, refer to EC-888, "Diagnosis Procedure".
SAT652J
1.CHECK MIL FUNCTION

2. Make sure that MIL lights up.

EC
ABBWA0424GB
P

ABBWA0425GB
1.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-621, "Diagnosis Procedure".

2.CHECK DTC WITH METER A

YES >> GO TO 3. EC
C
YES >> Replace combination meter. D

PBIB2962E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV
valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes
through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
PBIB1588E
1.CHECK PCV VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
NO >> Replace PCV valve.
PBIB1589E

A
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an EC
electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent
to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
C
E
PBIB2657E
F
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION G

H
as follows.
ECM ECM
Voltage I
37
F48 (Refrigerant pressure sensor F48 18 1.0 - 4.0 V
J
signal)
YES >> INSPECTION END JMBIA2162ZZ
K

AABWA0215GB

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.

YES >> GO TO 2. A
EC
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor harness
connector and ground. C
Refrigerant pressure sensor

Ground Voltage D
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
SEF479Y
F
• Harness connectors E8, F8. G
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
4.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
I
3. Check the continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ECM harness connec-
tor.
J
Refrigerant pressure sensor ECM
Continuity
K
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M

• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor N
O
6.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and refrigerant pressure sensor harness connec-
tor. P
Refrigerant pressure sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
YES >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.

SUB FUEL PUMP
SUB FUEL PUMP
A
Sub fuel pump is installed on sub fuel tank. When ethanol density in fuel tank is high, ECM activates sub fuel EC
pump and supplies fuel in sub tank (gasoline) to engine so that cold start ability is improved. ECM does not
directly activate sub fuel pump. When engine starts cold, ECM turns ON/OFF sub fuel pump relay and controls
sub fuel pump.
C
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK D

2. Perform "sub fuel pump relay" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Listen to sub fuel pump operation sound. E
Motor operating sound should be heard.

Does sub fuel pump make an operating sound? F
NO >> EC-896, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G

SUB FUEL PUMP
ABBWA0427GB
1.CHECK SUB FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

2. Disconnect sub fuel pump relay.

SUB FUEL PUMP
4. Check the voltage between sub fuel pump relay harness con-
nector and ground. A
Sub fuel pump relay

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal EC
1
E60 Ground Battery voltage
3
C
NO >> GO TO 2. D
• Harness connectors M69, E7 E
• 15 A fuse (No.5)
• Harness for open or short between 15 A fuse and sub fuel pump relay
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and sub fuel pump relay F
• Harness for open or short between sub fuel pump relay and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
H
3. Check the continuity between sub fuel pump relay harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Sub fuel pump relay ECM

I
Continuity
E60 2 E58 97 Existed J
YES >> GO TO 4. K
4.CHECK SUB FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L
2. Disconnect sub fuel pump harness connector
3. Check the continuity between sub fuel pump relay harness connector and sub fuel pump harness connec-
tor. M
Sub fuel pump relay Sub fuel pump

Continuity N
E60 5 E61 1 Existed
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
5.CHECK SUB FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect sub fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check the continuity between sub fuel pump harness connector and ground.

SUB FUEL PUMP
Sub fuel pump

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E61 2 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
Refer to EC-898, "Component Inspection (Sub Fuel Pump Relay)".
YES >> GO TO 7.

YES >> Replace sub fuel pump.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Component Inspection (Sub Fuel Pump Relay) INFOID:0000000006030072

2. Remove sub fuel pump relay.
3. Check the continuity between sub fuel pump relay terminals
Terminals Conditions Continuity

12 V detect current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Existed
3 and 5
No current supply Not existed
PBIB0098E

ECM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [MR18DE (FFV)]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
ECM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000006401737
EC
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

Remarks: C
I.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the D
ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. this IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals
input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
Monitor Item Condition Values/Status
Almost the same speed as E
ENG SPEED • Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indication.
the tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-607, "Diagnosis Procedure".
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-607, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
A/F ALPHA-B1 See EC-607, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S1 (B1) • Engine: After warming up
1.0 V
• Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions H
are met.
0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0 V
- After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load I
LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR(B1) • Engine: After warming up Change more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
J
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as
VHCL SPEED SE
dication. the speedometer indication.
The preset vehicle speed is K
SET VHCL SPD • Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
displayed.
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14 V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9 V L

ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*1 (Engine stopped) M
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8 V
TP SEN 1-B1 (Engine stopped)
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V N
TP SEN 2-B1*1 (Engine stopped)
O
Depending on fuel level of
FUEL LEVEL SE • Ignition switch: ON
fuel tank.
START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF P
CLSD THL POS
engine ON

ECM
Rear window defogger switch: ON
ON
and/or Lighting switch: 2nd position
Rear window defogger switch and lighting
OFF
switch: OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Heater fan switch: ON ON

HEATER FAN SW
engine Heater fan switch: OFF OFF
INJ PULSE-B1 (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even 0%
PURG VOL C/V (M/T) slightly, after engine starting.)
• No load 2,000 rpm 20% - 90%

INT/V TIM (B1) (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 20°CA
• No load
INT/V SOL (B1) (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 60%
• No load
engine ON
• For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch: ON
ON
• Except above OFF
OFF
(208°F)or less.
• Engine: After warming up Engine coolant temperature is
COOLING FAN LOW
• Air conditioner switch: OFF between98°C (208°F) and 100°C (212°F)
HIGH
(212°F) or more
• Engine: Running ON
HO2S1 HTR (B1) • Ignition switch: ON
OFF
(Engine Stopped)
• After the following conditions are met.
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
• For 2 minutes after starting engine OFF
Almost the same speed as
I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
the tachometer indication
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as
VEHICLE SPEED
dication. the speedometer indication

ECM
A
Selector lever: Except above OFF
Indicates intake air tempera- EC
INT/A TEMP SE • Ignition switch: ON
ture
• Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0 V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
C
• Engine: After warming up, idle the E22 (Gasoline) BTDC 7°
IGN TIMING
engine E100 (Ethanol) BTDC 3°
A/F LEARN-B1 • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine −16.500 - 10.359% D
O2 SEN HTR DTY • Engine: Running 30 - 100%
Depending on alcohol mix-
ALCOHOL MIX • Ignition switch: ON E
ture of engine oil
Depending on ethanol densi-
ETHANOL DENS • Ignition switch: ON
ty of fuel
Depending on fuel level of F
FUEL LEVEL • Ignition switch: ON
fuel tank
HO2S1 HTR VOLT • Engine: Running 2344 - 3594 mV
G
Indicates accumulation value
ETHANOL CONS • Ignition switch: ON
of ethanol consumption
ESTM ENG OIL
• Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F) H
TEMP
Sub fuel pump operates ON
SUB FP STATUS • When engine starts
Sub fuel pump not operates OFF
I
HI SPD FUEL • When refuel judgement is ON ON
LEARN • Except above OFF
• Ignition switch: ON after the following conditions are met. J
ON
REFUEL JDG - Fuel level increases when ignition switch is OFF.
• Engine: Running K
ON
ALCOHOL EVA STA - When alcohol mixture of engine oil evaporates
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
L
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
TERMINAL LAYOUT M
MBIB0045E
P
PHYSICAL VALUES
NOTE:
• ECM is located near the battery in the engine room.
• Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
• Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.

ECM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ -– Signal name
Output
0 - 14 V

• Engine stopped
1 121
Throttle control motor (Open) Output • Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
(L) (B)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully de-
pressed
JMBIA0512GB
2 121 Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE

Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(SB) (B) power supply (11 - 14 V)
0 - 14 V
• For 10 second after turning
ignition switch ON
3 121
Throttle control motor (Close) Output • Engine stopped
(P) (B)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully re-
leased
JMBIA0512GB
5
— ECM ground — — —
(B)
1.0 - 4.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes de-
pending on rpm at idle
6 121 Crankshaft position sensor JMBIA0514GB

Input
(W) (B) (POS)
1.0 - 4.0 V
[Engine is running]
JMBIA0515GB
9 0 - 4.0 V
Ignition signal No. 3
(SB)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
10 NOTE:
Ignition signal No. 1 The pulse cycle changes de-
(R)
JMBIA0516GB
121
28 Output
(B) Ignition signal No. 2
(LG) 0 - 4.0 V
[Engine is running]
29 • Warm-up condition
Ignition signal No. 4 • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
(G)
JMBIA0517GB

ECM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ -– Signal name
Output
Sensor ground EC
11
— [Crankshaft position sensor — — —
(O)
(POS)]
12 121
Sensor power supply C
[Crankshaft position sensor — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(BR) (B)
(POS)]
15 121 Sensor power supply D
— [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(W) (B) (Refrigerant pressure sensor)
18 Sensor ground
— — — —
(BR) (Refrigerant pressure sensor)
E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5 V
• A few seconds after turning
20 121 ECM relay ignition switch OFF F
Output
(P) (B) (Self shut-off) [Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds af- BATTERY VOLTAGE
ter turning ignition switch (11 - 14 V) G
OFF
21 BATTERY VOLTAGE
Fuel injector No. 4
(V) (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running] H
• Idle speed
23 NOTE:
Fuel injector No. 2 The pulse cycle changes de-
I
(O)
121
JMBIA0089GB
J
59 Output
(B) Fuel injector No. 1
(L) BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
K
[Engine is running]
60 • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
Fuel injector No. 3 L
(Y)
JMBIA0090GB
M
0 - 1.5 V
↓
22 121 [Ignition switch: ON → OFF]
Throttle control motor relay Output BATTERY VOLTAGE
(Y) (B) (11 - 14 V) N

ECM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ -– Signal name
Output
1.0 - 4.0
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes de-
25 121 Camshaft position sensor JMBIA0518GB

Input
(G) (B) (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0
[Engine is running]
JMBIA0519GB

BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neu-
27 121 (11 - 14 V)
PNP switch Input tral (M/T)
(L) (B)
0V
Sensor ground
30
— [Camshaft position sensor — — —
(L)
(PHASE)]
Sensor power supply
33 121
[Camshaft position sensor — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(O) (B)
(PHASE)]
34 121 Sensor power supply
— [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(R) (B) (Throttle position sensor)
[Engine is running]
37 18
Refrigerant pressure sensor Input • Both A/C switch and blower 1.0 - 4.0 V
(Y) (V)
fan motor switch: ON (Com-
pressor operates)
0 - 14 V
[Engine is running]
39 121 • Warm-up condition
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater Output
(G) (B)
JMBIA0520GB

• Engine stopped (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is starting]
• Sub fuel control solenoid 0 - 1.5 V
40 121 valve: operates
Sub fuel control solenoid valve Output
(G) (B)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)

ECM
Terminal No.
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ -– Signal name
Output
BATTERY VOLTAGE EC
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
D
42 121 EVAP canister purge volume JMBIA0087GB
Output
(P) (B) control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
E
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000
rpm (More than 100 seconds F
after starting engine.)
JMBIA0521GB
G
[Engine is running] 0 - 14 V
• After the following conditions
H
are met
- Engine: after warming up
- Keeping the engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 I
43 121 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater Output for 1 minute under no load
(G) (B) JMBIA0520GB
[Ignition switch: ON] J

• Engine stopped
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
• For 2 minutes after starting (11 - 14 V)
engine K
• Idle speed
44 121 [Engine is running]
Knock sensor 2 — 2.4 V
(B) (B) • Idle speed L
46 Sensor ground
— — — —
(Y) (Heated oxygen sensor 1)
47
—
Sensor ground
— — —
M
(O) (Heated oxygen sensor 2)
48 Sensor ground
— — — —
(O) (Intake air temperature sensor) N
51 Sensor ground
— — — —
(R) (Mass air flow sensor)
52 Sensor ground O
— — — —
(Y) (Throttle position sensor)
Sensor ground
56
— (Engine coolant temperature — — —
(B)
sensor)
P

ECM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ -– Signal name
Output
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
0 - 14 V
62 121 Intake valve timing control sole-
Output
(P) (B) noid valve [Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000rpm
JMBIA0522GB

Knock sensor 1 Input 2.4 V
(W) (B) • Idle speed
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Input 0 - 1.0 V
(BR) (Y) • Warm-up condition
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to
3,000 rpm quickly after the
following conditions are met
66 47
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Input - Engine: after warming up 0 - 1.0 V
(W) (O)
- Keeping the engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000
rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
0 - 4.8 V
67 48
Intake air temperature sensor Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
(V) (O)
air temperature.
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) More than 0.36 V
71 52 leased
Throttle position sensor 1 Input
(L) (Y) [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Less than 4.75 V
pressed
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Less than 4.75 V
72 52 leased
Throttle position sensor 2 Input
(B) (Y) [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) More than 0.36 V
pressed
[Engine is running]
73 51 • Idle speed
Mass air flow sensor Input
(G) (R) [Engine is running]

ECM
Terminal No.
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ -– Signal name
Output
0 - 4.8 V EC
75 56 Engine coolant temperature
Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
(P) (B) sensor
[Ignition switch: ON] C
• For 1 second after turning ig-
0 - 1.5 V
nition switch ON
Fuel pump relay Output
(GR) (B) D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than 1 second after
(11 - 14 V)
turning ignition switch ON
82 121 Input/ E
CAN communication line — —
(L) (B) Output
0V
• Brake pedal: Fully released F
84 121
Stop lamp switch Input [Ignition switch: OFF]
(R) (B) BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal: Slightly de-
(11 - 14 V)
pressed G
87 121 Input/ BATTERY VOLTAGE
Data link connector • CONSULT-III or GST: Dis-
(LG) (B) Output (11 - 14 V)
connected
H
89 121 Power supply for ECM (Back- BATTERY VOLTAGE
Input [Ignition switch: OFF]
(Y) (B) up) (11 - 14 V)
90 121 Input/
CAN communication line — — I
(P) (B) Output
93 121
Ignition switch Input BATTERY VOLTAGE
(O) (B) [Ignition switch: ON] J
(11 - 14 V)
• Brake pedal: Slightly de-
pressed (A/T) 0V K
• Brake pedal or clutch pedal:
94 121 Slightly depressed (M/T)
ASCD brake switch Input
(G) (B) [Ignition switch: ON] L
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(A/T)
(11 - 14 V)
• Brake pedal and clutch pedal:
Fully released (M/T) M
[Engine is starting]
• Sub fuel pump relay: oper- 0 - 1.5 V
97 121 ates N
Sub fuel pump relay Output
(Y) (B)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
Sensor ground O
98
— (Accelerator pedal position sen- — — —
(T)
sor 2)
Sensor ground P
99
— (Accelerator pedal position sen- — — —
(R)
sor 1)
100 Sensor ground
— — — —
(B) (ASCD steering switch)
Sensor power supply
105 121
(Accelerator pedal position sen- — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(SB) (B)
sor 2)

ECM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ -– Signal name
Output
• Engine stopped
0.3 - 0.6 V
106 98 Accelerator pedal position sen- leased
Input
(BR) (Y) sor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
1.95 - 2.4 V
pressed
• Engine stopped
0.6 - 0.9 V
107 99 Accelerator pedal position sen- leased
Input
(G) (R) sor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
3.9 - 4.7 V
pressed
4V
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
0V
• MAIN switch: Pressed
108 100 1V
ASCD steering switch Input • CANCEL switch: Pressed
(R) (B)
• RESUME/ACCELERATE 3V
switch: Pressed
2V
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed
Sensor power supply
113 121
(Accelerator pedal position sen- — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(P) (B)
sor 1)
115 121 BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(G) (B) (11 - 14 V)
118
(B)
119
(B)
— ECM ground — — —
120
(B)
121
(B)

ECM
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000006030074
EC
ABBWA0386GB
P

ECM
ABBWA0387GB
Fail Safe INFOID:0000000006030075
NON DTC RELATED ITEM

ECM
Engine operating condi- Reference A

Detected items Remarks
tion in fail-safe mode page
Engine speed will not Malfunction indicator When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the
rise more than 2,500 rpm lamp circuit driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control
EC
due to the fuel cut system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related
diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the EC-886
driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open C
by means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL
circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.
D
DTC RELATED ITEM

E
P0011 Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
control does not function.
F
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after following
P0118 ture sensor circuit condition.
CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. G
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-III display)
H
Just as ignition switch is turned ON
40°C (104°F)
or START
Approx. 4 minutes after engine
80°C (176°F) I
starting
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling J
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. K
P0223 condition.
L
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor When the fail-safe system for vehicle speed sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
(High) while engine is running.
P0605 ECM (When ECM calculation function is malfunctioning:)
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a M
ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
P1805 Brake switch ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a N
small range.
Vehicle condition Driving condition O
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a P
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

ECM
P2119 Electric throttle control ac- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
tuator malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the
engine stalls.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2128 condition.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000006401738
chart.

• P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
• P0112 P0113 Intake air temperature sensor
• P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
• P0327 Knock sensor
• P0461 P0462 P0463 P0464 Fuel level sensor
• P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
• P0562 P0563 Battery voltage
• P0605 ECM
• P1610 P1611 P1612 P1614 P1615 NATS
• P1706 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
• P0201 P0202 P0203 P020, P0261 P0262 P0264 P0265 P0267 P0268 P0270 P0271 FUEL INJECTOR
2 • P0030 P0031 P0032 P0053 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
• P0036 P0037 P0038 P0054 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
• P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1
• P0136 P0137 P0138 P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2
• P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
• P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid
• P3021 P3022 P3023 Sub fuel control solenoid valve
• P3075 P3077 P3078 Sub fuel pump relay
• P0300 P0031 P0032 P0033 P0304 Misfire
• P0351 P0352 P0353 P0354 Ignition coil
• P0420 Three way catalyst function
• P1564 ASCD steering switch
• P1572 ASCD brake switch
• P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor

ECM
DTC Index INFOID:0000000006401739
A
DTC*1 Items
SRT code Trip MIL Reference page EC
CONSULT-III ECM*2
U1000 1000*3 CAN COMM CIRCUIT — 2 — EC-620
U1001 1001*3 CAN COMM CIRCUIT — 2 — EC-620 C
U1010 1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) — 1 × EC-622

NO DTC IS DETECTED. D
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — — Flashing*4 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 — 2 — EC-623
E
P0030 0030 HO2S1 HTR B1 — 2 × EC-626
P0031 0031 HO2S1 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-626
P0032 0032 HO2S1 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-626 F
P0036 0036 HO2S2 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-630
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-630
G
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-630
P0053 0053 HO2S1 HTR B1 — 2 × EC-634
P0054 0054 HO2S2 HTR B1 — 2 × EC-638 H
P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 1 × EC-642
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 1 × EC-648
P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 1 × EC-648 I
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 2 × EC-654
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 2 × EC-654
J
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC — 1 × EC-658
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRC — 1 × EC-658
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-662 K
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-662
P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR — 2 × EC-667
L
P0130 0130 HO2S1 (B1) — 2 × EC-669
P0131 0131 HO2S1 (B1) — 2 × EC-675
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) — 2 × EC-681 M
P0133 0133 HO2S1 (B1) × 2 × EC-687
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) — 2 × EC-695
N
P0136 0136 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × EC-701
P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × EC-707
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × EC-713 O
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × EC-719
P0201 0201 INJECTOR CIRC-CYL1 — 2 × EC-724
P

P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-740
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-740
P0261 0261 CYLINDER 1 INJECTOR — 2 × EC-724

ECM
DTC*1 Items
SRT code Trip MIL Reference page
ECM*
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE — 2 × EC-745
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE — 2 × EC-745
P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE — 2 × EC-745
P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE — 2 × EC-745
P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE — 2 × EC-745
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 — 2 — EC-750
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT — 2 × EC-753
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 — 2 × EC-758
P0351 0351 IGNITION COIL A — 2 × EC-764
P0352 0352 IGNITION COIL B — 2 × EC-764
P0353 0353 IGNITION COIL C — 2 × EC-764
P0354 0354 IGNITION COIL D — 2 × EC-764
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 × 2 × EC-772
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V — 2 × EC-776
P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V — 2 × EC-776
P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR — 2 — EC-780
P0462 0462 FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC — 2 — EC-782
P0463 0463 FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC — 2 — EC-782
P0464 0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR — 2 — EC-782
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC — 2 × EC-783
P0562 0562 SYSTEM VOLTAGE — 1 or 2 — EC-785
P0563 0563 SYSTEM VOLTAGE — 2 — EC-786
P0605 0605 ECM — 1 or 2 — or × EC-787
P1111 1111 INT/V TIM C/CIRC — 2 × EC-789
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP — 1 × EC-793
P1299 1299 CTP LEARNING — 1 × EC-797
P1564 1564 ASCD SW — 1 — EC-800
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW — 1 — EC-804
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN — 1 — EC-813
P1610 1610 LOCK MODE — 1 — BL-106
P1611 1611 ID DISCARD IMM-ECM — 1 — BL-106
P1612 1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU — 1 — BL-106
P1614 1614 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY — 1 — BL-106
P1615 1615 DIFFERENCE OF KEY — 1 — BL-106
P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT — 2 × EC-815
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT — 1 — EC-820

ECM
DTC*1 Items
SRT code Trip MIL Reference page A
ECM*
P2100 2100 ETC MOT PWR-B1 — 1 × EC-824
P2101 2101 ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-827 EC
P2103 2103 ETC MOT PWR — 1 × EC-824
P2109 2109 CTP LEARNING — 1 × EC-832
C
P2119 2119 ETC ACTR-B1 — 1 × EC-833
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC — 1 × EC-835
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC — 1 × EC-835 D
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC — 1 × EC-840
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC — 1 × EC-840
E
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR-B1 — 1 × EC-845
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR — 1 × EC-850
P3021 3021 SUB FUEL CONT SOL/V — 2 — EC-856 F
P3022 3022 SUB FUEL CONT SOL/V — 2 — EC-856
P3075 3075 SUB FUEL CONT SOL/V — 2 — EC-860 G
P3078 3078 SUB FUEL CONT SOL/V — 2 — EC-860 H
*3: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III. I
*4: When engine is running, MIL may flash. For details, refer toEC-585, "Diagnosis Description"
How to Set SRT Code INFOID:0000000006401740

J
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-III K
Perform corresponding DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE one by one based on Performance Priority in
the table on “SRT Item”.
WITHOUT CONSULT-III L
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

ECM
DRIVING PATTERN
PBIB3651E
• The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving
habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the short-
est.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within
zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
ECM
• Sea level
• Flat road A
• Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagno-
EC
sis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
• The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 46 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V). C
• The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 46 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
• The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage D
between the ECM terminal 95 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
• When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. E
Test Value and Test Limit INFOID:0000000006401744
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. F
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. G
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by On Board Monitor ID (OBDMID), Test ID (TID), Unit and
Scaling ID and can be displayed on the GST screen.
The items of the test value and test limit will be displayed with GST screen which items are provided by the
ECM. (e.g., if bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of bank 1 are displayed) H

ECM
Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Description
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 83H 0BH
cycle
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 84H 0BH
cycle
P0130 85H 0BH
cycle
P0130 86H 0BH
cycle
Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
P0133 87H 04H
Rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
P0133 88H 04H
Lean)
P2A00 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A00 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P0130 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
01H
(Bank 1)
O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich to
P014C 8DH 04H
Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1
P014C 8EH 04H
O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to
P014D 8FH 84H
Rich Bank 1 Sensor 1
HO2S
P014D 90H 84H
O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to
P015A 91H 01H
P015A 92H 01H
O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to
P015B 93H 01H
P015B 94H 01H
P0138 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Maximum sensor output voltage for test

02H P0137 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle
P0138 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage
P0139 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage
P0143 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 3 Maximum sensor output voltage for test

03H P0144 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle

ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
P0151 83H 0BH
cycle
C
P0151 84H 0BH
cycle
Minimum sensor output voltage for test D
P0150 85H 0BH
cycle
P0150 86H 0BH
cycle
E
Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
P0153 87H 04H
Rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
P0153 88H 04H
Lean)
F
P2A03 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A03 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
G
P0150 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0153 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
05H
(Bank 2)
O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich to H
P014E 8DH 04H
P014E 8EH 04H
Lean Bank 2 Sensor 1 I
P014F 8FH 84H
HO2S
O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to J
P014F 90H 84H
P015C 91H 01H
Lean Bank 2 Sensor 1 K
P015C 92H 01H
O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to L
P015D 93H 01H
P015D 94H 01H
Rich Bank 2 Sensor 1 M
P0158 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Maximum sensor output voltage for test N

06H P0157 08H 0CH
(Bank 2) cycle
P0159 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage O
P0163 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 3 Maximum sensor output voltage for test P

07H P0164 08H 0CH
(Bank2) cycle

ECM
Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0420 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
P0420 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value
21H
(Bank1) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output volt-
P2423 83H 0CH
age
CATA- P2423 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst

LYST P0430 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
P0430 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value
22H
(Bank2) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output volt-
P2424 83H 0CH
age
P2424 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
P0400 80H 96H
rate (short term)
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
P0400 81H 96H
rate (long term)
EGR Low Flow Faults: Difference between
31H EGR function
SYSTEM P0400 82H 96H max EGR temp and EGR temp under
idling condition
P0400 83H 96H Low Flow Faults: Max EGR temp
High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase
P1402 84H 96H
rate
VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0011 80H 9DH
alignment check diagnosis)
VTC exhaust function diagnosis (VTC
P0014 81H 9DH
35H VVT Monitor (Bank1)
P0011 82H 9DH
drive failure diagnosis)
P0014 83H 9DH
VVT drive failure diagnosis)
SYSTEM VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0021 80H 9DH
P0024 81H 9DH
36H VVT Monitor (Bank2)
P0021 82H 9DH
P0024 83H 9DH

ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
EVAP control system leak Difference in pressure sensor output
39H P0455 80H 0CH
(Cap Off) voltage before and after pull down
C
EVAP control system leak Leak area index (for more than 0.04
3BH P0442 80H 05H
(Small leak) inch)
Leak area index (for more than 0.02 D
P0456 80H 05H
inch)
EVAP
SYSTEM EVAP control system leak Maximum internal pressure of EVAP
3CH P0456 81H FDH
(Very small leak) system during monitoring
E
Internal pressure of EVAP system at the
P0456 82H FDH
end of monitoring
Difference in pressure sensor output
3DH Purge flow system P0441 83H 0CH voltage before and after vent control
F
valve close
A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0031 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
41H 81H 0BH G
(Bank 1) High Input:P0032 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- Low Input:P0037 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
42H 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) High Input:P0038 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of Heater electric cur- H
O2 SEN- 43H P0043 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) rent to voltage
SOR
HEATER A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0051 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
45H 81H 0BH
(Bank 2) High Input:P0052 rent to voltage I
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- Low Input:P0057 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
46H 80H 0CH
er (Bank 2) High Input:P0058 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of Heater electric cur- J
47H P0063 80H 0CH
er (Bank 2) rent to voltage
Secondary Air Injection System Incor-
P0411 80H 01H
rect Flow Detected K
Bank1: P0491 Secondary Air Injection System Insuffi-
81H 01H
Bank2: P0492 cient Flow
Secondary Air Injection System Pump L
P2445 82H 01H
Stuck Off
Second- Secondary Air Injection System High
71H Secondary Air system P2448 83H 01H
ary Air Airflow M
Bank1: P2440 Secondary Air Injection System Switch-
84H 01H
Bank2: P2442 ing Valve Stuck Open
P2440 85H 01H

Secondary Air Injection System Switch- N
ing Valve Stuck Open
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
P2444 86H 01H
Stuck On
O
Fuel injection system function P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
81H
(Bank 1) P0171 or P0172 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped
FUEL
SYSTEM
Fuel injection system function P0174 or P0175 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim P
82H
(Bank 2) P0174 or P0175 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped

ECM
Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
P0301 80H 24H
the first cylinder
P0302 81H 24H
the second cylinder
P0303 82H 24H
the third cylinder
P0304 83H 24H
the fourth cylinder
P0305 84H 24H
the fifth cylinder
P0306 85H 24H
the sixth cylinder
P0307 86H 24H
the seventh cylinder
P0308 87H 24H
the eighth cylinder
P0300 88H 24H
the multiple cylinders
Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of the
P0301 89H 24H
first cylinder
MISFIRE A1H Multiple Cylinder Misfires
P0302 8AH 24H
second cylinder
P0303 8BH 24H
third cylinder
P0304 8CH 24H
fourth cylinder
P0305 8DH 24H
fifth cylinder
P0306 8EH 24H
sixth cylinder
P0307 8FH 24H
seventh cylinder
P0308 90H 24H
eighth cylinder
P0300 91H 24H
the single cylinder
P0300 92H 24H
single cylinder
P0300 93H 24H
multiple cylinders

ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
P0301 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv-
ing cycles
C
A2H No. 1 Cylinder Misfire
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy-
P0301 0CH 24H
cles
D
A3H No. 2 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- E
P0302 0CH 24H
cles
P0303 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv- F
P0303 0CH 24H
cles G
H
P0304 0CH 24H
cles
MISFIRE
I
P0305 0CH 24H J
cles
A7H No. 6 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles K
P0306 0CH 24H
cles
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving L
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- M
P0307 0CH 24H
cles
ing cycles
N
A9H No. 8 Cylinder Misfire
P0308 0CH 24H
cles
O

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MR18DE (FFV)]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000006030078
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-882
EC-856,
Sub fuel pump circuit 1 1 EC-860,
EC-895
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-934
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-725
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-570
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-890
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-516
EC-827,
EC-833
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-516
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-767
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-615

SYMPTOM
A

EC



Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

EC-642, F
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
EC-648
1
EC-658,
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3
EC-667 G
3 EC-669,
EC-675,
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-681, H
EC-695
EC-662,
EC-740,
I
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-797,
EC-832,
2 2 EC-845
EC-835, J
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 EC-840,
EC-850
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-750 K
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-753
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-758
L
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-783
EC-787,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-787
M
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-623
cuit
PNP signal circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-815
N
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-892
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-879
ATC-26 , O
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
MTC-25
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4 BRC-19
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. P
(continued on next page)

SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Fuel Fuel tank FL-10
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-182
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-162
Air cleaner EM-162
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-162
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-165
Air leakage from intake manifold/
EM-165
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery SC-4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit SC-28
Starter circuit 3 SC-8
1
Signal plate 6 EM-230
MT-56or
PNP signal 4
AT-92
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-214
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-230
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain EM-187
mecha-
Camshaft EM-197
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-187
Intake valve
3 EM-214
Exhaust valve

SYMPTOM
A

EC



Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ F
Gasket EM-169,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EX-4
Three way catalyst
G
HC adsorption catalyst
Lubrica- EM-172,
tion Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil LU-17,
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler LU-20, H
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
LU-22
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-17
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-34
I
Thermostat 5 CO-34
Water pump CO-32 J
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 CO-21
Cooling fan CO-31
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminat- 5 K
CO-23
ed coolant
NATS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System) 1 1 BL-210
L

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
FUEL CUT CONTROL (AT NO LOAD AND HIGH ENGINE SPEED)

If the engine speed is above 2,000 rpm under no load (for example, the selector lever position is neutral and
engine speed is over 2,000 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off var-
ies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-529,
"System Description".

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MR18DE (FFV)]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT EC
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni- H
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the I
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000006030081
J
NOTE:
• This Procedure is applied only to models with Intelligent Key system and NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYS-
K
TEM).
• Remove and install all control units after disconnecting both battery cables with the ignition knob in the
″LOCK″ position.
• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work. L
If DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnostic results.
For models equipped with the Intelligent Key system and NATS, an electrically controlled steering lock mech-
anism is adopted on the key cylinder. M
For this reason, if the battery is disconnected or if the battery is discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
steering wheel rotation will become impossible.
If steering wheel rotation is required when battery power is interrupted, follow the procedure below before
starting the repair operation. N
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Connect both battery cables. O
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Use the Intelligent Key or mechanical key to turn the ignition switch to the ″ACC″ position. At this time, the
steering lock will be released. P
3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released and the steering wheel can be
rotated.
4. Perform the necessary repair operation.
5. When the repair work is completed, return the ignition switch to the ″LOCK″ position before connecting
the battery cables. (At this time, the steering lock mechanism will engage.)
6. Perform a self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000006030082
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield.
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T INFOID:0000000006030083
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-63, "Description".
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000006030084

running.
turned OFF.
connect battery ground cable.
SEF289H

the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
PBIB1164E
- Freeze frame data
PRECAUTIONS
- Test values A
• When connecting ECM harness connector (A), fasten (B) it
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the figure.
EC
1. ECM
B. Loosen
C. fasten
C
D
JMBIA0259ZZ
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or E

break).
terminal, when connecting pin connectors. F
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam- G
age to ICs.
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal-
PBIB0090E H
of ICs, etc.
• Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference I
Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-899, "Reference Value".
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent. J
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious
incidents. K
• Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MEF040D L

CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE or Component Function M
Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Component Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
N
SAT652J

PRECAUTIONS
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow
damage the ECM power transistor.
SEF348N


ily.
SEF709Y

observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic
trol units.
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave
ratio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [MR18DE (FFV)]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000006030085
EC
Tool number
Description C
Tool name
Fuel tube adapter
D
E
PBIB3043E
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000006030086 F
Tool name Description G

ture sensor
H
I
S-NT705

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti- J
a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita- K
nia Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
L
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica- M
tion MIL-A-907)
N
S-NT779

FUEL PRESSURE
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [MR18DE (FFV)]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
FUEL PRESSURE
Inspection INFOID:0000000006030087
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE (FUEL PUMP)

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Start engine.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel pump fuse (1) located in IPDM E/R (2).
• : Vehicle front
2. Start engine.
pressure.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
PBIB2958E
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE (SUB FUEL PUMP)

With CONSULT-III
2. Select "SUB FUEL CONT SOL/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.
3. Touch "ON" and wait 6 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION
Engine coolant temperature is less than 90 °C (194°F)
NOTE:
Sub fuel control solenoid valve automatically turns OFF after 6 seconds.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
• Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because C11 models do not have fuel return system.
• Use fuel tube adapter [SST: (KV10118400)] to check fuel pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.

FUEL PRESSURE
2. Connect fuel tube adapter [SST: (KV10118400)] to quick con-
nector. A
• A: Fuel pressure gauge
• B: Fuel hose for fuel pressure check
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. EC
4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
C
2
At idling : Approximately 420 kPa (4.2bar, 4.28 kg/cm ,
60.9 psi) BBIA0695E
D
6. If result is unsatisfactory, check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.
If OK, Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”.
If NG, Repair or replace.
E

Inspection INFOID:0000000006030088
1. Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
2. Check EVAP canister as follows:
a. Block port (B).
b. Blow air into port (A) and check that it flows freely out of port (C).
c. Release blocked port (B).
d. Apply vacuum pressure to port (B) and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports (A) and (C).
e. Block port (A) and (B).
f. Apply pressure to port (C) and check that there is no leakage.
PBIB2961E
3. Visually inspect the fuel check valve for cracks, damage, loose connections chafing and deterioration.
4. Check fuel check valve as follows:
a. Blow air through connector on the fuel tank side. A considerable
resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow should be
directed toward the EVAP canister side.
b. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side. Air flow
should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
c. If fuel check valve is suspected or not properly functioning in
step 1 and 2 above, replace it.
SEF552Y
5. Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, stick-
ing, etc.
a. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF989X
b. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar, 0.156 - 0.204 kg/

Pressure:
cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
–6.0 to –3.4 kPa (–0.06 bar to –-0.034bar, –0.061 to –
Vacuum:
0.035 kg/cm2, –0.87 to –0.49 psi)
c. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
SEF943S

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [MR18DE (FFV)]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

Idle Speed INFOID:0000000006030089
EC
Transmission Condition Specification

C
A/T No load* (in P or N position) 700 ± 50 rpm
M/T No load* (in Neutral position) 700 ± 50 rpm
*: Under the following conditions D
• A/C switch: OFF
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position E
Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000006030090
F
Specification
Transmission Condition
E22 (Gasoline) E100 (Ethanol)
G
A/T No load* (in P or N position) 3 ± 5° BTDC 7 ± 5° BTDC
M/T No load* (in Neutral position) 3 ± 5° BTDC 7 ± 5° BTDC
*: Under the following conditions H
• A/C switch: OFF
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position I

Tida 2010 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Tida 2010 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ENGINE

Revision: June 2010 EC-1 2011 Tiida GOM

Revision: June 2010 EC-2 2011 Tiida GOM

SERVICE INFORMATION ......................... 148 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .................................. 203

Revision: June 2010 EC-4 2011 Tiida GOM

Revision: June 2010 EC-5 2011 Tiida GOM

Revision: June 2010 EC-6 2011 Tiida GOM

Revision: June 2010 EC-7 2011 Tiida GOM

Revision: June 2010 EC-10 2011 Tiida GOM

Revision: June 2010 EC-11 2011 Tiida GOM

Revision: June 2010 EC-12 2011 Tiida GOM

Revision: June 2010 EC-13 2011 Tiida GOM

U1000*3, *5 1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-79

U1001*3 1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-79

P0134*6 0134 HO2S1 (B1) EC-94

P0138*6 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-96

Revision: June 2010 EC-14 2011 Tiida GOM

Alphabetical Index INFOID:0000000006029195

ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*7 P1065 1065 EC-107

Revision: June 2010 EC-15 2011 Tiida GOM

HO2S1 (B1) P0134*6 0134 EC-94

HO2S2 (B1) P0138*6 0138 EC-96

Revision: June 2010 EC-16 2011 Tiida GOM

On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine INFOID:0000000006029198

Revision: June 2010 EC-17 2011 Tiida GOM

• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

• Do not disassemble ECM.

• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

Revision: June 2010 EC-18 2011 Tiida GOM

• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow H

Revision: June 2010 EC-19 2011 Tiida GOM

• Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to

Revision: June 2010 EC-20 2011 Tiida GOM

KV101118400 Measuring fuel pressure

Revision: June 2010 EC-21 2011 Tiida GOM

Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before

Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

Revision: June 2010 EC-22 2011 Tiida GOM

Revision: June 2010 EC-23 2011 Tiida GOM

Emission-related diagnostic information

Emission-related Diagnostic Information INFOID:0000000006029205

EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*3 2 — EC-79

Revision: June 2010 EC-24 2011 Tiida GOM

Items DTC*1 Reference

HO2S1 (B1)*6 P0132 0132*6 2 × EC-92

HO2S1 (B1)*6 P0134 0134*6 2 × EC-94 D

HO2S2 (B1)*6 P0138 0138*6 2 × EC-96

ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*7 P1065 1065 2 × EC-107

ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 × EC-110

APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 × EC-135

Revision: June 2010 EC-25 2011 Tiida GOM

DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

Revision: June 2010 EC-26 2011 Tiida GOM

Revision: June 2010 EC-27 2011 Tiida GOM

5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

Revision: June 2010 EC-28 2011 Tiida GOM

A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) EC

A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) F

M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)

6.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

U10003, 5 1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-79

HO2S1 (B1)6 P0132 01326 2 × EC-92

HO2S1 (B1)6 P0134 01346 2 × EC-94 D

HO2S2 (B1)6 P0138 01386 2 × EC-96